JP2014176399A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that is able to suitably hinder occurrence of fraudulent entry of a ball into a ball pocket.SOLUTION: A shoot ball is shot into a game area PA by performing a shooting operation of a shooting operation device, thereby operating a game ball shooting mechanism. Specifically, a shooting flow for a shoot ball takes place in the manner described below. While intake balls are kept stored on an upper tray, a shooting operation is performed in the shooting operation device, thereby operating a ball feeding device, so that intake balls are taken into. The balls taken in are discharged out of a pachinko machine. When a detection sensor 142 detects the ball taken in, one shoot ball is supplied onto a shooting rail by a ball supply device. In this condition, a shooting solenoid is operated, thereby shooting this shoot ball toward the game area PA.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines are known as a kind of gaming machine. Specifically, the pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area in which game balls flow down is formed, and the game board is provided with a plurality of entrance parts into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. ing. When a game ball enters the ball entry part, a privilege such as payout of the game ball or execution of an internal lottery is given to the player. In addition, the game ball that has entered the entrance part is discharged to the back side of the game board. In addition, the game board is provided with a discharge unit for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the entry units to the outside of the game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-6412

  Here, in the pachinko machine such as the above-described example, an act of illegally generating a ball entering the ball-entry unit is assumed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing an act of illegally generating a ball entering a ball-entry unit. Is.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a launching ball toward a game area,
A pitching part into which a launching ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the launch ball entering the pitching portion;
A sphere storage section for storing a sphere;
Taking-in means for taking in the sphere stored in the sphere storage unit;
When a sphere is taken in by the taking-in means, a firing control means for enabling the launching ball to be fired by the launching means;
With
When the projecting control unit makes the possible state and the projecting unit launches a projecting ball, a projecting ball different from the ball that triggered the possible state is launched.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to suppress suitably the act which generates illegally the entrance into a entrance part.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the flow of a taking-in ball. (A) It is a schematic diagram of a ball feeding device and a ball supply device, (b) is a front view of a main body frame showing an enlarged area on the lower side of the main body frame, and (c) this pachinko machine is added to the existing pachinko machine. It is a front view of the main body frame for demonstrating the structure at the time of utilizing this main body frame. It is a schematic diagram of the main body frame for demonstrating the structure for circulating a launch ball with a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change start process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge operation process in a discharge control part. It is a time chart for demonstrating the operation | movement content for launching a launch ball toward a game area. It is a front view of the main body frame in a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the main body frame for demonstrating the flow of the game ball in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting ball monitoring process in MPU of the main controller. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of a main body base. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in management side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the input port of main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the winning detection process performed by main side MPU, (b) The structure of the 1st winning determination area, the 2nd winning determination area, the 1st post calculation area, and the 2nd post calculation area is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a time chart for demonstrating the timing which monitors each winning information, (B) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the calculation performed when winning determination is performed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success / failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process for ball | bowl supply performed with management side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball management process performed in payout side MPU. (A)-(c) It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge management process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process performed with a launch control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the management process of the game ball | bowl use performed by payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the return management process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process for a partial return performed in the payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process for medium supply performed in management side MPU. (A)-(d) It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) It is sectional drawing of a game ball, (b) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the IC tag embed | buried under a game ball. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ID registration performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | emission management process at the time of ID registration performed with the payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process for ID registration performed with a launch control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows ID acquisition processing performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ID monitoring process performed in payout side MPU. It is a time chart for demonstrating the content of the monitoring process of ID information, and the content when 1st ID abnormality generate | occur | produces. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the hold notice performed by main side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of jackpot result, (c) In order to explain a hold storage area It is explanatory drawing of. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining ball corresponding | compatible process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the operation part for performing partial return in 4th Embodiment, (b) The management process for partial return performed by payout side MPU is shown. It is a flowchart. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for performing partial return in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the management process for partial return performed in payout side MPU. . (A) It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice in 6th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending | holding notice performed with an audio | voice emission control apparatus. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the change process of the production content performed with an audio | voice light emission control apparatus, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a 1st change process, (c) It is a 2nd change process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a front view of a main body frame 13 provided in the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. A main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the main body frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the main body frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the main body frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the main body frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described.

  The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. A window portion 21 is formed on the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel 22 having transparency.

  A display light emitting unit 23 is provided above the window 21 in the front door frame 14. The display light-emitting unit 23 incorporates a light-emitting body such as an LED, and is turned on or blinking according to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and responds to the occurrence of an abnormality at a predetermined abnormality Lighting or blinking is performed in the manner described above. A pair of left and right speaker portions 26 are provided on the left and right corners in the upper region of the front door frame 14. The speaker unit 26 outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the occurrence of an abnormality when a predetermined abnormality occurs.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the ball feed device 131 side described later while aligning them in a line. The lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33. The player can directly replenish the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 34 directly with the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 respectively. It is possible to take it out.

  The lower bulging portion 32 has a discharge operation portion 35 that is operated to discharge game balls stored in the lower tray 34 to a ball receiving box (not shown) disposed below the lower bulging portion 32. Is provided. The discharge operation unit 35 is provided so as to be able to open and close a ball extraction hole 36 formed in the bottom of the lower plate 34. In the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is arranged at the closed position, the ball punching hole 36 is in the closed state, the discharge of the game ball from the lower plate 34 is prevented, and in the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is arranged in the open position. The ball removal hole 36 is opened, and the game ball is allowed to be discharged from the lower tray 34. The discharge operation unit 35 is not provided with an electric actuator, and the discharge operation unit 35 needs to be manually operated in order to move the discharge operation unit 35 between the closed position and the open position. Moreover, although the discharge operation part 35 is urged | biased toward the closed position, the discharge operation part 35 is made into an open position by utilizing the engagement relationship between the discharge operation part 35 and the lower side bulging part 32. It is the structure which can be made to hold | maintain. When the holding state is released, the discharge operation unit 35 is returned to the closed position.

  A firing operation device 37 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude to the near side. When the firing operation device 37 is operated, a game ball launching mechanism described later is driven and controlled, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are launched.

  Next, the main body frame 13 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41. A front door frame opening sensor 42 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened is provided on the upper portion of the resin base 41. The front door frame opening sensor 42 has a pin that can be projected and retracted from the front surface of the resin base 41. When the front door frame 14 is closed in the main body frame 13, the pin is pushed in and the front door frame 14 is detected to be closed. When the front door frame 14 is opened, the pin returns to the protruding position, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. Incidentally, the front door frame opening sensor 42 outputs a HI-level front door frame opening signal to a later-described payout control device when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and LOW when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. Outputs the front door frame opening signal of level. However, the signal output mode is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 43 is formed at the center of the resin base 41. A game board 51 is detachably attached to the resin base 41. The game board 51 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 51 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 13 through the window hole 43 of the resin base 41.

  The structure of the game board 51 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 51.

  An inner rail portion 51a and an outer rail portion 51b are attached to the game board 51 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 51a and the outer rail portion 51b guide means. As a guide rail is formed. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 45 (see FIG. 2) provided below the window hole 43 in the resin base 41 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  The game board 51 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 52, a special prize winning device 53, a first operating port 54, a second operating port 55, a through gate 56, a symbol display device 61, a special figure unit 62, a universal figure unit 63, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 56, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any of the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when 10 balls are paid out to the general winning opening 52, 10 winning balls are paid out, and 15 when the winning into the special winning device 53 occurs. When a prize ball is paid out and a ball enters the first operation port 54, three prize balls are paid out and a ball enters the second operation port 55. The payout of one prize ball is executed.

  Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, although the number of prize balls in the second operation port 55 is smaller than that in the first operation port 54, the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. The second working port 55 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first working port 54.

  In addition, an out port 58 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 51, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 58. The game board 51 is provided with a large number of nails 59 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 58, the general winning port 52, the special prize winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 are used. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 51. Both the first working port 54 and the second working port 55 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 54 and 55 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 54 is located upward. The second operating port 55 is provided with a general electric utility 55a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 55a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 55, and the winning of the second operating port 55 becomes possible when the electric utility item 55a is opened.

  A through gate 56 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 55 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 56 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 56 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 56 can win the second operating port 55.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 56, the universal power 55 a of the second operating port 55 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 56 as a trigger, and a normal display of the general-purpose unit 63 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The display 63 fluctuates and displays the pattern. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 63a is terminated, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 55a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the general map display unit 63a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 63a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 63, a universal map display 63b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display 63a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 56 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general-purpose hold display portion 63b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the special figure unit 62 and the symbol display device 61.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display section 62a. The display area of the special figure display unit 62 a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 61. In the special figure display unit 62a, a winning lottery is performed using a winning at the first operating port 54 or a winning at the second operating port 55 as a trigger, and thereby a change display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 62a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 62a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 62, a special figure holding display part 62b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 62a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reservation display section 62b.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 61 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 61 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 61, when the special symbol display unit 62a performs a variation display or a predetermined display on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or winning in the second operating port 55, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 61, not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, but also a display effect during the opening / closing execution mode described later that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is done.

  The display content when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 61 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, the symbols of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row. As a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. The stop is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, the display surface of the symbol display device 61 includes five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Is set.

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. The variable display starts to scroll in the direction. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the symbol display is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is either the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result, which will be described later, the same symbol combination is placed on any active line. It is formed. Further, in the case of an explicit high probability winning result which will be described later, the same symbol combination is not formed on any effective line, but a predetermined symbol combination is formed on any effective line.

  In addition, based on the winning in any one of the operation ports 54 and 55, the display is started in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 3, when a winning lottery is made based on winning in the first operating port 54 or winning in the second operating port 55, winning in the special electricity winning device 53 becomes possible. Transition to open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 53 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 51 and an open / close door 53a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 53a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 53a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a game ball launching mechanism 45 is provided below the game board 51 in the main body frame 13 in which the game board 51 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 41. The game ball launching mechanism 45 has a launch rail 46 that extends toward the guide rail, a ball supply device 47 that feeds the game ball onto the launch rail 46, and a game ball supplied on the launch rail 46 toward the guide rail. A firing solenoid 48 which is an electric actuator for firing. When the launch operation device 37 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the ball supply device 47 is driven and controlled to supply one game ball on the launch rail 46, and then the launch solenoid 48 is driven. By being controlled, the game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  The launch operation device 37 includes a touch sensor 37a for detecting that the annular handle portion of the launch operation device 37 is touched by the player, and a game ball even in a situation where the handle portion is being rotated. A ball stop switch 37b that is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the ball is electrically connected (see FIG. 10). The game ball launching mechanism 45 is driven and controlled on the condition that the touch sensor 37a detects that the handle is touched by the player and the ball stop switch 37b is not operated.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  A main controller 81 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The main control device 81 includes a main control board that manages and manages the progress of the game in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  A back pack unit 15 is provided so as to cover a part of the main controller 81 from the rear. A sound emission control device 91 (see FIG. 10) is provided above the main control device 81 on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The sound light emission control device 91 includes a sound light emission control board that performs sound output control, light emission control, and display control device control in accordance with instructions from the main control device 81, and the sound light emission control board is accommodated in a substrate box. .

  The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 101, and a payout mechanism unit 102 and a control device assembly unit 104 are attached to the back pack 101. The back pack 101 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a base portion 111 to which the payout mechanism portion 102 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 112 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The entire sound emission control device 91 is covered from the rear by the protective cover portion 112 and a part of the main control device 81 is covered from the rear.

  The base portion 111 is provided with a body frame opening sensor 114 that detects whether or not the body frame 13 is opened. When the body frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the metal contact of the body frame opening sensor 114 is closed and the closing of the body frame 13 is detected. When the body frame 13 is opened, the metal contact is opened and the body frame 13 is opened. Is to be detected.

  Incidentally, the main body frame opening sensor 114 outputs a HI level main body frame opening signal to a payout control device to be described later when the main body frame 13 is in an open state, and when the main body frame 13 is in a closed state, the main body frame opening sensor 114 is at a low level. Output an open signal. However, the signal output mode is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  The base part 111 is provided with a fastener 115 for fastening to the main body frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the main body frame 13 by setting the fastener 115 in a fastening state. On the other hand, the back pack unit 15 can be rotated from the main body frame 13 by releasing the fastening state of the fastener 115.

  In the base portion 111, a payout mechanism portion 102 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 112. That is, a tank 121 opened upward is provided at the uppermost part of the back pack 101, and the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 121. A tank rail 122 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 121, and a case rail 123 extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 122. A dispensing device 124 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 123.

  The case rail 123 is provided with a ball non-detection sensor 123a so as to detect a game ball connected from the tank 121 to the payout device 124 through a passage in the case rail 123. The ball non-detection sensor 123a is configured by a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range is detected and output as an electric signal. The ball non-detection sensor 123a is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. .

  The ball non-detection sensor 123a outputs an electrical signal to a payout control device described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting. In the payout control device, it is determined whether or not the tank 121 is in a no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor 123a.

  The case rail 123 is provided with a ball removal operation switch 123b. For example, when the game balls stored in the tank 121 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, the ball removal operation switch 123b is pressed when all the game balls on the case rail 123 are discharged, and the case rail 123 and its downstream side The game balls stored in the game can be discharged.

  The payout device 124 pays out game balls. The dispensing device 124 is provided with a dispensing motor 124a (see FIG. 10) inside the housing. When the dispensing motor 124a is not driven and controlled, a rotating body (not shown) of the dispensing device 124 is stopped. The payout of game balls toward the downstream side is stopped. On the other hand, when the payout motor 124a is driven and controlled, the rotating body rotates and the game balls supplied from the tank 121 side are paid out toward the downstream side. A payout detection sensor 124b (see FIG. 10) is provided inside the housing of the payout device 124, and a game ball paid out toward the downstream side as the rotating body rotates is detected by the payout detection sensor 124b. . The payout detection sensor 124b is configured by a known magnetic detection type proximity sensor, converts a change in magnetic field due to the passage of the game ball through the through hole into an electric signal, and outputs the electric signal to a payout control device described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting.

  The game balls paid out from the payout device 124 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 125 provided in the base unit 111 of the back pack 101. The game ball distribution unit 125 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 124 to either the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34. Specifically, the game balls paid out from the payout device 124 basically flow down toward the upper plate 33, the upper plate 33 becomes full, and a game is played from the upper plate 33 side to the position of the game ball distribution unit 125. When the ball is filled, the game ball paid out from the payout device 124 thereafter flows down toward the lower plate 34.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 13 is provided with a shutter 127. When the front door frame 14 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 13, the pressing force from the front door frame 14 is released. As a result, the shutter 127 is closed. As a result, the game ball passage between the game ball distributor 125 and the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 is closed at the position of the shutter 127. When the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter 127 is placed in the open position by being pressed by the front door frame 14, and the game is directed from the game ball distribution unit 125 side toward the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34. The sphere can flow down.

  Returning to the description using FIG. 6, the back-pack substrate 126 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 102. The back pack substrate 126 is supplied with, for example, a main power of 24 volts AC, and is turned on or off by a manual switching operation of the power switch 126a.

  A control device assembly unit 104 is attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 111. The control device assembly unit 104 is equipped with a payout control device 161, a power supply / launch control device 171, and a ball rental connection terminal plate 181. The payout control device 161, the power supply / launch control device 171, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 181 are arranged such that the payout control device 161 and the ball lending connection terminal plate 181 are located behind the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is arranged so as to be in front of and behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 161 contains a payout control board for controlling the payout device 124 in a colorless and transparent substrate box. The payout control device 161 is provided with a state display portion 161a by being mounted on a payout control board housed in a board box. In the status display unit 161a, the monitoring result is notified regarding the monitoring target in the payout control device 161. The status display unit 161a is provided as a 7-segment display using LEDs, but is not limited to this, and may be a dot display unit or a liquid crystal display device. The payout control device 161 is provided with a state return switch 161b. For example, when the state return switch 161b is pressed when a payout error occurs such as a ball jam in the payout device 124, the ball jam is eliminated. Further, in the situation where the monitoring result is notified in the state display unit 161a, the notification in the state display unit 161a is canceled by pressing the state return switch 161b after eliminating the event that has caused the notification. The However, for some events, even if the state return switch 161b is pressed, the notification state of the state display unit 161a is not released.

  The power source / launch control device 171 includes a power source and a launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices, and further, a launch operation apparatus by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball in accordance with operation 37 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 171 is provided with a RAM erase switch 171a. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the interruption is stored and retained. It is like that.

  The ball lending connection terminal plate 181 is electrically connected to a ball lending device provided on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a payout control device 161, and a ball lending operation device on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and is mainly lended by a player. An operation command is taken in and output to the payout control device 161.

<Flow of game balls in pachinko machine 10>
Next, the flow of game balls in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a game ball taken from the upper plate 33 when the launch operation device 37 is operated by a player is different from a game ball launched into the game area PA by the game ball launching mechanism 45. First, the flow of game balls taken from the upper plate 33 will be described. In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, a game ball taken from the upper plate 33 is referred to as a take-in ball, and a game ball launched into the game area PA is referred to as a launch ball.

  The take-in ball supplied to the upper plate 33 is made of soft iron and can be attracted by a magnet. The supply of the take-in ball to the upper plate 33 is performed by the player's hand. In addition, the supply ball is supplied to the upper plate 33 by the payout device 124 when a winning is made to any of the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55. It is also done by operating. The take-in balls supplied to the upper plate 33 by winning will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 7. In the tank 121 of the payout mechanism unit 102, the take-in balls are collected from the ball circulation device in the island facility of the game hall. Supplied. This take-in ball is supplied to the upper plate 33 when the dispensing device 124 operates.

  The take-in ball supplied to the upper plate 33 is guided toward the downstream side through the ball feeder 131. The ball feeding device 131 is provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 at a position behind the introduction port facing the inside of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper plate 33. Since the inlet of the upper plate 33 is formed at the right end, which is one end of the upper plate 33 in the horizontal direction, the ball feeder 131 is also provided at the right end, which is one end of the upper plate 33 in the horizontal direction. In addition, a lead-out port for leading the take-in ball paid out from the payout device 124 into the upper plate 33 is formed at the opposite end portion, that is, the left end of the upper plate 33.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 8A, the ball feeding device 131 receives the ball feeding passage 132 continuing from the introduction port of the upper plate 33 and the take-in ball B1 guided by the ball feeding passage 132 from below. A supply member 133 for supplying one by one toward the downstream side, a receiving position that allows the reception of the take-in ball B1 from the ball feed passage 132, and the received take-in ball B1 to the downstream side. And a ball feed drive unit 134 for rotating the supply member 133 between the supply positions. The ball feed drive unit 134 is a drive unit that places the supply member 133 at the receiving position by using magnetic attraction and releases the suction to place the supply member 133 at the supply position. For example, a rotary motor may be used.

  The take-in ball derived toward the downstream side by the ball feeding device 131 is not supplied onto the firing rail 46 of the game ball launching mechanism 45, but is taken in / out formed on the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13. It is supplied to the passage part 141. The intake / exhaust passage portion 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a front view of the main body frame 13 in which the lower area of the main body frame 13 is enlarged.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the intake / discharge passage portion 141 is formed to extend in the longitudinal direction in the main body frame 13. The inlet portion of the intake / discharge passage portion 141 exists at the supply position of the intake ball by the ball feeding device 131 and is opened forward. The outlet portion of the intake / discharge passage portion 141 reaches the lower end of the main body frame 13. The take-in ball that has passed through the take-in / discharge passage portion 141 is discharged to the ball circulation device in the island facility of the game hall. Therefore, when the take-in ball stored in the upper plate 33 is led out toward the downstream side by the ball feeding device 131, the take-in ball is released from the pachinko machine 10 to the island without being launched toward the game area PA. Discharged into the facility.

  A ball feed detection sensor 142 is provided in the middle of the intake / discharge passage portion 141. As the ball feed detection sensor 142, a known magnetic detection type proximity sensor is used, and a change in the magnetic field due to the passage of the through-hole into the ball is converted into an electrical signal and output to the power supply / launch control device 171. To do. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output in a state where no captured ball is detected, and an HI level signal is output in a state where a captured ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a captured ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a captured ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which has detected the taking-in ball | bowl. Moreover, it is not limited to a proximity sensor, You may use other sensors, such as an optical sensor. By providing the ball feed detection sensor 142, when the take-in ball is supplied from the upper plate 33 side to the take-out / discharge passage portion 141, the supplied take-in ball is detected by the ball feed detection sensor 142. One by one is detected.

  By detecting one take-in ball by the ball feed detection sensor 142, the ball supply device 47 of the game ball launch mechanism 45 is driven and one shot ball is supplied onto the launch rail 46. Then, when the launch solenoid 48 is driven and the output shaft of the launch solenoid 48 projects, the supplied launch ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  In this configuration, the launch ball to be fired by the game ball launching mechanism 45 is not ejected from the game area PA and then to the island facility, but is circulated in the pachinko machine 10 and becomes a launch target again. It has become. The configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic view of the main body frame 13 for explaining a configuration for circulating the launch ball in the pachinko machine 10.

  The launch ball that has been launched by the game ball launch mechanism 45 and has reached the game area PA from the guide rail of the game board 51 flows down the game area PA while bouncing back to the nail 59 or the windmill. Then, the launch ball that has entered the general winning opening 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, or the out port 58 is guided to the back side of the game board 51.

  A recovery passage forming body 151 is provided on the back surface of the resin base 41 and the game board 51 of the main body frame 13, and a partition is formed using the recovery passage forming body 151, the resin base 41 and the back surface of the game board 51. The collected passage is led to a region below the out port 58 and above the ball supply device 47. The guided launch ball is led out to a supply passage portion 152 formed on the back surface of the resin base 41.

  The supply passage portion 152 is provided so that the most downstream portion of the collection passage communicates with the ball supply device 47, and the fired ball collected by the collection passage is supplied to the ball supply device 47 through the supply passage portion 152. Is done. The passage width of the supply passage portion 152 is equal to or larger than one firing ball, and the supply passage portion 152 is provided with a ball polishing device 153. The ball polishing device 153 includes a ball polishing body 153a and a polishing drive unit 153b. The spherical polished body 153 a is a brush-like long and thin member, and is provided so as to be coaxial with the supply passage portion 152. The ball polishing body 153a is supported so as to be rotatable about its axis, and one end in the longitudinal direction is connected to the polishing drive unit 153b via a link mechanism as shown. The polishing drive unit 153b is composed of a rotary motor, and the ball polishing body 153a continues to rotate in a predetermined direction while a drive signal is supplied. The polishing drive unit 153b is electrically connected to the payout control device 161, and while the operating power is supplied to the payout control device 161, the supply of the drive signal to the polishing drive unit 153b is continued and polished. The operation of the driving unit 153b is continued.

  In the configuration in which the ball polishing body 153a is accommodated in the supply passage portion 152, the ball polishing body 153a allows the launch ball flowing into the supply passage portion 152 to flow down to the ball supply device 47 side, and The size and arrangement position are set so that the brush portion of the ball polishing body 153a contacts the projecting ball flowing down. Therefore, the launch ball collected in the supply passage portion 152 is guided to the ball supply device 47 and polished by the ball polishing body 153a at the time of the guide.

  As described above, the launch ball that has been launched by the game ball launching mechanism 45 and has reached the game area PA returns to the ball supply device 47 through the supply passage 152, but depending on the launch strength, the game ball launching mechanism 45 There is also a launch ball that has been launched but returns to the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. In order to collect the fired ball, a foul ball collection unit 154 is provided.

  The foul ball collection unit 154 is provided in the main body frame 13 between the launch rail 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 45 and the outer rail portions 51 a and 51 b of the game board 51. If the ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 45 does not reach the upper part of the game area PA and returns to the guide rail constituted by the inner and outer rail parts 51a and 51b, the foul ball is a foul. The ball enters the ball collecting unit 72. The fired balls collected by the foul ball collection unit 154 are guided to the collection passage through the transfer device 155 provided between the foul ball collection unit 154 and the collection passage forming body 151. Then, the fired ball guided to the recovery passage is supplied to the ball supply device 47 through the supply passage portion 152. Note that the transport device 155 is electrically connected to the payout control device 161, and the supply of the drive signal to the transport device 155 is continued while operating power is supplied to the payout control device 161. The operation at 155 is continued.

  The sphere supply device 47 is provided for an opening formed so as to penetrate the main body frame 13 in the front-rear direction, and the launch ball supplied from the supply passage portion 152 on the back surface of the main body frame 13 13 has a function of supplying on the firing rail 46 provided on the front surface of the vehicle. The ball supply device 47 has the same configuration as the ball feeding device 131. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), the sphere supply passage 47a continuing from the supply passage portion 152 and the fired ball B2 guided by the sphere supply passage 47a are received from the lower side one by one. Between the supply member 47b for supplying the discharge ball B2 and the reception position for allowing the reception of the launch ball B2 from the ball supply passage 47a and the supply position for supplying the received shot ball B2 downstream. And a ball supply drive unit 47c for rotating 47b. The sphere supply drive unit 47c is a drive unit that places the supply member 47b at the receiving position by using magnetic attraction and releases the suction to place the supply member 47b at the supply position. For example, a rotary motor may be used.

  The launch ball derived toward the downstream side by the ball supply device 47 is supplied onto the launch rail 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 45. In this state, the firing solenoid 48 is driven and the output shaft of the firing solenoid 48 protrudes, so that the fired ball supplied on the firing rail 46 is fired toward the game area PA.

  As described above, the collection passage forming body 151, the supply passage portion 152, the foul ball collection portion 154, and the transfer device 155 are provided, so that the shot balls launched toward the game area PA are generated inside the pachinko machine 10. It will circulate. The circulating launch ball is made of brass so that it cannot be attracted by a magnet. Therefore, in order to generate a winning to any of the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55, the flow direction of the shot ball launched toward the game area PA is changed to the magnet. If you try to change it illegally, it will not be possible. Further, the number of circulating launch balls is a predetermined number so that the launch balls supplied from the ball supply device 47 onto the launch rail 46 are not lost even if the launch of the launch balls continues. The number is 100 (for example, 100). Thereby, in the situation where the operation of the firing operation device 37 is performed and the taking-in of the take-in ball from the upper plate 33 is continued, the launch of the fired ball is continued.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 45, the take-out / discharge passage portion 141, the ball feed detection sensor 142, the collection passage formation body 151, the supply passage portion 152, the foul ball collection portion 154, and the transport device 155, This is a configuration unique to the pachinko machine 10 that is different from the sphere. On the other hand, the other hardware configuration is not a configuration unique to the pachinko machine 10 in which the take-in ball and the launch ball are different from each other, and the game ball stored in the upper plate is directly guided to the game ball launching mechanism. It can also be used in other pachinko machines. That is, the outer frame 11, the front door frame 14, the back pack unit 15, and the game board 51 can be used in common with existing pachinko machines. Thereby, it becomes possible for the maker which manufactures both this pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine of the existing structure to perform member management suitably.

  Further, the present pachinko machine 10 can be applied to an existing pachinko machine. FIG. 8C is an enlarged front view showing a lower region of the main body frame 13 when the main body frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is applied to an existing pachinko machine. As shown in FIG. 8 (c), the closing plates 201, 202 cover the opening of the main body frame 13 where the ball supply device 47 is provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the opening of the intake / discharge passage 141. It is possible to use the main body frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in an existing pachinko machine by attaching a game ball launching mechanism for an existing pachinko machine instead of the game ball launching mechanism 45 for the pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible. Thereby, it becomes possible for the maker which manufactures both this pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine of the existing structure to perform member management suitably.

  In addition, the position of the launch solenoid 48 of the game ball launch mechanism 45 is the existing position of the game ball launch mechanism 45 due to the fact that the intake / discharge passage portion 141 is formed behind the ball feeder 131 of the front door frame 14 in the main body frame 13. It is a position closer to the ball entrance side of the guide rail in the game board 51 than the pachinko machine. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the firing solenoid 48 of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed at the upper left position with respect to the firing solenoid 203 of the existing pachinko machine. In this case, the launch solenoid 48 of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged so as to be coaxial with the launch solenoid 203 of the existing pachinko machine. Thereby, since the launch angle of the launch ball is constant, the configuration of the guide rail can be shared with the existing pachinko machine, and the game board 51 can be used in common.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 82 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 83 is mounted on the main control board 82. The MPU 83 includes a ROM 84 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 83 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 84 is executed. A RAM 85, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 84 and the RAM 85 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 83, but each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 83 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board (not shown) provided in the main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 83 and a payout controller 161 is connected. The power failure monitoring board is connected to the power / fire control board 172 of the power / fire control device 171 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 83 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 52a, 53b, 54a, 55b, and 56a are connected to the input side of the MPU 83. The various winning detection sensors 52 a, 53 b, 54 a, 55 b, and 56 a have a prize winning corresponding ball portion such as a general winning port 52, special electric winning device 53, first operating port 54, second operating port 55, and through gate 56. A detection sensor provided on a one-to-one basis is included, and the MPU 83 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, in the MPU 83, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first working port 54 and the second working port 55.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a power failure monitoring board, a payout control device 161, and a sound emission control device 91 are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 161 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a special electric drive unit 53 c that opens and closes the special electric side opening / closing door 53 a of the special electric prize winning device 53, and a general electric drive unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 55 a of the second operating port 55. 55c, special figure unit 62 and universal figure unit 63 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display part 62 a and a special figure holding display part 62 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Similarly, the universal map unit 63 is provided with a universal map display unit 63 a and a universal map hold display unit 63 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 82, and the MPU 83 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the special electricity driving unit 53c so that the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 55a is elected in the open state, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the power generator 55c so that the power utility item 55a is opened and closed. In each game round and opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special figure unit 62 is executed in the MPU 83. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the utility model 55a is clearly indicated, the MPU 83 executes display control of the universal unit 63.

  The payout control device 161 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 124 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81. The payout control device 161 includes a payout control board 162, and an MPU 163 is mounted on the payout control board 162. The MPU 163 includes a ROM 164 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 163, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 165 that is used as a work memory.

  The MPU 163 is provided with an input / output port. A main control board 82 is connected to the input side of the MPU 163. In addition, a payout ball detection sensor 138 of the payout device 124 is electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 163 so that the number of take-in balls actually paid out toward the downstream side can be grasped. .

  On the other hand, the main control board 82 is connected to the output side of the MPU 163. Further, the payout motor 137 of the payout device 124 is electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 163, and the payout device 137 drives and controls the payout device 124 to discharge the intake ball toward the downstream side. To do. In addition, a ball polishing device 153 and a transport device 155 are electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 163. In a situation where operating power is supplied to the MPU 163, drive signals to the ball polishing device 153 and the transport device 155 are transmitted. The output is continued, and the operations of the ball polishing device 153 and the conveying device 155 are continued.

  The power source / launch control device 171 is a power source. The power supply / launch control board 172 is provided with a power supply circuit 173 having a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control board 82 and the payout control board 162. . The power supply circuit 173 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 174 and a power-off power supply unit 175.

  The power-on power supply unit 174 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and each of the main control board 82, the payout control board 162, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Is generated, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main control board 82, the payout control board 162, and the like. As its outline, the power-on power supply unit 174 takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied via the back pack substrate 126 provided in the back pack unit 15 and + 12V for driving various sensors, motors, and the like. A voltage, a + 5V voltage for logic, and the like are generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main control board 82, the payout control board 162, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring board described above is provided in the middle of the power supply path between the power-on power supply unit 174 and the MPU 83 of the main control board 82. The power failure monitoring board monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power-on power supply unit 174. Then, when this voltage is less than 22 volts, it is determined that the power supply is cut off, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power interruption signal) is set to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power interruption) in the MPU 83 of the main control board 82. Thereby, the power failure process is executed in the MPU 83 of the main control board 82.

  The power supply unit 175 for power interruption includes a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 174 for power supply is used. Charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or when the power supply is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off), the main power unit 175 is discharged from the power interruption. Storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the RAM 85 of the control board 82 and the RAM 165 of the payout control board 162. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the RAM 85 of the main control board 82 and the RAM 165 of the payout control board 162 is erased while the power for storage holding is supplied from the power supply unit 175 for power interruption. It is retained without any memory.

  Incidentally, the capacity of the power supply unit 175 for power interruption is ensured to be relatively large, and information stored in the RAMs 85 and 165 before the power supply is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). The Further, the power interruption power supply unit 175 is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power in the power supply unit 175 for power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  Although not shown in the figure, the power supply / launch control board 172 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 175 for power interruption. In the power supply / launch control board 172, even after the DC stable power supply of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing is discharged to execute the power failure processing in the MPU 83 of the main control board 82. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source for the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time. Thereby, MPU83 can perform and complete the process at the time of a power failure normally.

  In addition to the power supply circuit 173, the power supply / launch control board 172 is provided with a launch control circuit 176 that performs launch control of the launch ball. The firing control circuit 176 includes a transmission circuit 177 that satisfies the conditions, a receiving circuit 178 that permits firing, and a firing control unit 179.

  The condition establishment transmission circuit 177 has a function of transmitting a condition establishment signal having a predetermined signal form to the MPU 83 when a predetermined launch condition is established. Specifically, the firing control circuit 176 may be in a situation where the touch sensor 37a that detects that the annular handle portion of the firing operation device 37 is touched by the player and the handle portion is being rotated. A ball stop switch 37b that is manually operated by a player to stop the firing of the ball is electrically connected. The launch control circuit 176 is electrically connected to the payout control board 162, and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the ball lending device is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 181.

  The transmission circuit 177 that satisfies the condition receives from the touch sensor 37a a signal indicating that the handle is being touched by the player, and receives a signal indicating that the handle is not manually operated from the ball stop switch 37b. Further, when a signal indicating that the ball lending device is connected is received from the MPU 163 of the payout control device 161, a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the MPU 83. . If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the MPU 83. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the MPU 83 of the main control board 82 does not receive the HI level condition establishment signal from the condition establishment transmission circuit 177, the MPU 83 transmits a LOW level emission permission signal (a signal not corresponding to the emission permission). On the other hand, when the MPU 83 receives the HI level condition establishment signal from the condition establishment transmission circuit 177 and there is no abnormal condition to stop the firing of the firing ball, the MPU 83 A launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to launch permission) is transmitted. However, the relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the launch permission signal may be reversed. Further, the MPU 83 newly starts transmission of the HI level firing permission signal every time reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, and when the reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is completed, the MPU 83 emits the HI level. End transmission of the permission signal. The launch permission receiving circuit 178 continuously supplies a signal corresponding to the launch permission signal (signal corresponding to launch permission) from the MPU 83 to the launch control unit 179 when receiving the launch permission signal (signal corresponding to launch permission).

  When the launch control unit 179 receives the launch permission signal of HI level from the launch permission receiving circuit 178, the launch control unit 179 controls the ball feeding device 131 and the detection result of the ball feed detection sensor 142 after the drive control. The ball supply device 47 and the firing solenoid 48 are controlled based on the above. When the HI level launch permission signal is continuously received in a situation where the launch ball can be launched, each drive control is executed so that one launch ball is fired at a period of 0.6 sec.

  The launch operation device 37 is provided with the handle portion as described above, and the firing intensity of the launch ball by the launch solenoid 48 increases as the operation amount of the handle portion increases. The firing operation device 37 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the handle portion, and the firing control unit 179 supplies the firing solenoid 48 with a voltage input from the variable resistor. Adjust the voltage of the drive signal to adjust the firing intensity.

  The sound emission control device 91 controls the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 26 based on the command received from the main control device 81 and transmits the command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 91 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the symbol display device 61.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 83>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 83 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 83 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform winning occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 62a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 61, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 63a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, when the winning random number counter C1 used for winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used when determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 61 fluctuate and change. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the variation type for determining the display duration in the special figure display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61 The counter CS is used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the general-purpose role 55a of the second operating port 55 is set to the open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 85a of the RAM 85.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation area 85b when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs.

  The special figure holding area 85b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning ball winning histories to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 are held and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 62a, and starting one game time At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general-purpose holding area 85c of the RAM 85 at the timing when the shot ball wins the through gate 56. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility 55a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility 55 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the game area PA in a situation in which the firing ball is continuously fired in the same manner, the utility object 55a of the second working port 55 is per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the open state of the open call using the open call lottery using the normal call random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 55a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set to be longer. Yes. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric power utility is selected and the open state of the electric utility object 55a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display continuation time for the display unit 63a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 55 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 54 than in the second operating port 55, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 54. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 55 increases.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 63a based on winning to the through gate 56) after the next public train opening lottery is performed and the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  When the public power open lottery using the general power random number counter C4 is won, the public power open state is entered. The public power open state is terminated when a predetermined number of power utility objects 55a are opened or closed, or when a predetermined upper limit number of firing balls wins the second operating port 55. . Specifically, the above upper limit number is 10 in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening / closing of the utility model 55a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the high-frequency support mode is more often than in the low-frequency support mode. There are three times. In addition, the duration of one opening of the utility model 55a is 1 sec in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 sec in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the shot ball wins the first working port 54 or the second working port 55. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won in the determination of the success / failure is stored in the ROM 84 as a success / failure table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity prize winning device 53 is controlled to open / close, and can be a transition trigger for at least one of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means. In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode winning / failing table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random number values to be a big win is set larger than when the low-probability mode success / failure table is referenced. Specifically, there are 20 pieces. In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode.

  If the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the shot ball wins the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the stored value of the big hit type counter C2.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the big hit is won is a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined opening duration has elapsed, and a predetermined upper limit number of launch balls have won a special electric prize device 53. That is. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the round number regulation mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 53 is relatively high during the period from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a single opening mode of the special prize winning device 53 is set in a plurality of types with different opening durations from when the special prize winning device 53 is opened until it is closed. Yes. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.05 sec, which is a shorter duration than the above long time, are set. ing. In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 37 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 45 is driven and controlled so that one launch ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 10. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time that is longer than the product of the firing period of the fired ball and the upper limit number of one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the firing period of the fired ball and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, an opening duration time shorter than the fired ball firing period is set. ing. Therefore, when the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electricity prize winning device 53 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game. When the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once in the aspect, it is expected that no special electric prize winning device 53 is won.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electricity winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a long-time manner. That is, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a long-time manner. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode. That is, the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 53 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. As long as the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity winning device 53 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode is started and ended, the value is not limited to the above value. It is.

  The sort destination of the type of jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 84 as a sort table. In the distribution table, as the types of jackpot results, a low probability jackpot result, an explicit high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode before shifting to the open / close execution mode becomes any low probability mode. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the jackpot result is the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically 100 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more after the transition. The low-frequency support mode that has been shifted to after the completion of the step will be the next jackpot result, and will at least continue until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The explicit high-accuracy big hit result is that the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening / closing execution It is a jackpot result that becomes the high-frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shifts, and the opening / closing execution mode It is a jackpot result that becomes the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In the distribution table, out of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit high probability big hit result. , “15-29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 61. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 61 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 61 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the symbols in the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in that state. A display state for performing variable display is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire symbol display device 61 after the combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 61, or in some symbol sequences, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the probability that the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 84 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. To be executed.

  On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the MPU 83 but by the sound emission control device 91. In this case, in the sound emission control device 91, the game times corresponding to any one of the jackpot results are easier to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the missed result, and a notice display having a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 61.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 83 determines the display continuation time in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display continuation time in the symbol display device 61. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 62a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 61.

<Various processes executed by the MPU 83>
Next, various processes executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 83 will be described. The processing of the MPU 83 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in the pachinko machine 10 at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, main processing in the MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, a power-on wait process on the main side is executed. In the power-on wait process on the main side, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RAM 85 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 83 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 171a provided in the power / fire control device 171 is manually operated. In the subsequent step S105, whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 85. Determine whether or not. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall is started, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 171a is being pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 171a is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 85 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 85. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to

  In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 85 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 83 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 85, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 83 will be described. The main control board 82 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, a frequency dividing circuit so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 83. Is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 83. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 83 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The MPU 83 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts and executes the timer interrupt process with at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To do.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 83, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 83, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 83 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing is set. In the timer interrupt processing at, the portion exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed. In the power failure process, after various data settings are made so that the state before power shut-off can be restored at the next power-on, the system waits until supply of operating power to the MPU 83 is completely shut off.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Specifically, by making an affirmative determination in step S206, the processing for advancing the game in steps S207 to S219 is not executed. Further, when the progress of the game is to be stopped, a command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91 so that the notification corresponding to the event that triggered the progress of the game is executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the MPU 83, and the supply of the operating power to the MPU 83 is stopped. When the RAM 85 is initialized while the operation of supplying the operating power is started while the RAM erasing switch 171a of the power supply / launch control device 171 is pressed later, the RAM 85 is not executed.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S207 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 53c and 55c is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 53 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 53c is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general electric utility 55a of the second working port 55 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 55c should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 52a, 53b, 54a, 55b, and 56a are read, and the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55 are read. And the process which specifies the presence or absence of the ball | bowl entering the through gate 56 is performed.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 85 collectively is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In subsequent step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of any one of magnetism, radio waves, and vibrations is confirmed using the detection results of the corresponding detection sensors. When it is confirmed that any of the fraud handling events has occurred, the game stop setting is performed in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, and an affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In a succeeding step S212, a firing control process for performing launch control of the launch ball is executed. In the launch control process, the HI level condition establishment signal is received from the condition establishment transmission circuit 177 in the power supply / emission control board 172, and the occurrence of fraud has not been confirmed in the fraud detection process in step S211. In this case, a HI level launch permission signal is transmitted to the launch permission reception circuit 178 in the power source / launch control board 172. On the other hand, when a LOW level condition establishment signal is received from the condition establishment transmission circuit 177 or when any fraud has been confirmed in the fraud detection process of step S211, the launch permission reception circuit 178 receives the signal. A LOW level launch permission signal is transmitted.

  In subsequent step S213, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 52a, 53b, 54a, 55b, 56a, gaming machine main body 12 and front door based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208. The opening of the frame 14 is confirmed.

  In the subsequent step S214, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S215, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary power transmission control process, when winning to the through gate 56 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is executed and the numerical information is stored. The numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, with the opening determination as a trigger, a process for performing an effect for a general map is executed in the general map display unit 63a. In addition, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the common utility 55a of the second working port 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S216, based on the processing results of immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 62a in the special figure hold display unit 62b, The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 63a to the general figure hold display unit 63b is set. In step S216, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 62a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the general map display unit 63a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In subsequent step S217, the content of the command received from the payout control device 161 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. Also, in step S218, a winning ball command is set as an output target on condition that a winning is made to any of the general winning opening 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55. The payout output process is executed.

  In a succeeding step S219, an out ball monitoring process is executed. A launch ball detection sensor is provided at a position adjacent to the most downstream portion in the launch rail 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 45, and from the launch ball detection sensor while the launch ball passing on the launch rail 46 is being detected. A HI level launch detection signal is output to the MPU 83, and a LOW level launch detection signal is output from the launch ball detection sensor to the MPU 83 while no launch ball is detected. In the out-sphere monitoring process, the number of fired balls that have passed on the firing rail 46 is measured based on the fire detection signal from the fired ball detection sensor, and the MPU 83 is measured every time the measured number of fired balls reaches 10. Outputs an external signal to the hall computer indicating that 10 firing balls have been fired, using an external terminal 113e for the out ball to be described later.

  Since the out sphere is measured using a counter provided in the RAM 85, the out sphere measurement result is stored and retained by the backup power even if the supply of the operating power to the MPU 83 is stopped.

  In addition, instead of a configuration in which a launch ball detection sensor for detecting a shot ball to be fired is provided as a sensor for detecting the launch of the out ball, the shot ball discharged from the game area PA to the back side of the game board 51 is used. It is good also as a structure which provides the sensor to detect. In this case, a sensor for detecting the emitted ball discharged from the outlet 58 is provided as the sensor, and the number of the emitted balls detected by the sensor, the general winning port 52, the special electric prize device 53, the first operation. It is good also as a structure which measures the sum with the number of the launching balls detected by each winning detection sensor of the mouth 54 and the 2nd action | operation opening | mouth 55 as the number of out balls.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) of the MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 is generated, a process for obtaining the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed in step S301. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the fired ball to the first working port 54 occurs or when the winning of the fired ball to the second working port 55 occurs, the special figure holding area 85b is used for holding. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit value (specifically “4”). Stored in the uppermost area of the holding area RE where no holding information is stored.

  In the acquisition process, when the hold information is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. The voice light emission control device 91 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the hold command, and changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 61 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. When the number of the hold information increases as described above, the display control process in step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) displays so as to change to the display content corresponding to the increase in the hold number. Control is performed.

  In a succeeding step S302, information on a special figure special electricity counter provided in the RAM 85 is read out, and in a step S303, a special figure special electric address table stored in the ROM 84 is read out. In step S304, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

  Here, the processing content of step S302-step S304 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process for controlling the effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for game times, a special figure variation start process (step S306) that is a process for starting the effect for game times and an effect for game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set.

  Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 53 Special electric power opening process (step S310), special electric power closing apparatus processing (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 53, ending of the opening / closing execution mode and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power end process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the MPU 83 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S311). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the process executed in the process, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed. The special figure special electricity counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306. If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S307. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S308. If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S309. If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process in step S310. If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process in step S311. If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S312. When any one of steps S306 to S312 is executed, the special figure special power control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the process of step S306-step S312 is demonstrated separately.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not holding information is stored in the special figure holding area 85b. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, a data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the sound emission control device 91 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S403, an appropriateness determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 84, the information for determination of success / failure among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical value obtained from the hit random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the information matches the high probability jackpot information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 84, and the low probability jackpot. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the ROM 84, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the low likelihood jackpot result, the explicit high likelihood jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game time related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 84 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 85. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  The information on the type of the picture to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the RAM 85 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, it corresponds to the distribution determination result in step S405. Set “1” to the flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S408. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game times corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the ROM 84 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 85. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing any one of steps S407 and S408, display continuation time acquisition processing is executed in step S409. In the acquisition process, the display at the current game time is determined according to the current gaming state, the result of the determination process, the result of the distribution determination process, the presence / absence of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter CS. Get the duration information.

  After the display continuation time acquisition process is executed in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410, and the display continuation time information acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 13) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game times, the symbol variation display on the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 61 are performed. In a state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 61, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is a time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

  In the subsequent step S411, the change command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. The change command has a data structure of 2 bytes. The 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and display duration time. And corresponding data. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a change command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process is performed by the next 4 bits of data. In addition, lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and time data corresponding to the display duration time is set by the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when receiving the change command, the sound emission control device 91 recognizes the change command from the identification data, and determines the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. And the display duration of the current game time is recognized from the time data. Here, since the MPU 83 selects a different display continuation time depending on whether or not a reach occurs, even if the information on the presence or absence of the reach is not included in the change command, the sound emission control device 91 continues the display. It is possible to identify the occurrence of reach from the time information. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and the type of the success / failure lottery mode. And data corresponding to the number of remaining continuations of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process and the following 4 bits of data are set. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is the data corresponding to the type of the lottery mode and the remaining number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode. Data is set. Therefore, when receiving the type command, the sound emission control device 91 recognizes the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Then, the type of success / failure lottery mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode are recognized from the data for the number of continuations.

  Here, both the change command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, in the sound emission control device 91, by comparing the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, noise or the like is received with respect to the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. And when both the lottery result data match, the production control corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both the lottery result data do not match Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound emission control device 91 may execute an effect for game times corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game times. Regardless of the result of the determination process, the symbol display device 61 may reliably stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the complete disconnection. In this case, the game turn effect may be configured to be performed over a display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, or may be configured to continue until the next variation command and type command are received. Also good.

  After performing the process of step S411, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display part 62a is started in step S412. In the subsequent step S413, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the process of step S413 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process of step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether or not it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display. A process for changing regularly is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not reach display occurs.

  Also, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, this special figure is executed after executing the above regular change process. The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91 in order to display the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 61 for final stop display. The display mode of the picture in the figure display unit 62a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. Also, information on the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game times is read from the ROM 84 and set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electricity counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure determining process in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special chart finalizing process, if the final stop time of the current game round has not elapsed, the special chart finalizing process is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed If the result of the determination of success / failure that triggered the current game is an out-of-game result, the special figure special counter is cleared to “0”, and then the processing for determining the special figure is terminated. If the result of the determination of success / failure is any jackpot result, processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the process for switching to the opening / closing execution mode, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the ROM 84 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. The opening command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 91 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound emission control device 91 can execute the effect in the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that has triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “3”. Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process of step S309 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special electricity start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If it has elapsed, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the RAM 85 and the RAM 85 is provided. Set 10 in the winning counter. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode by the MPU 83, and the winning counter is the winning of the upper limit number of shot balls in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode. This is a counter for specifying whether or not the MPU 83 has occurred. Then, an opening continuation time corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter, and the special electric prize winning device 53 is brought into an opened state. Further, when the special electric prize winning device 53 is in an open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. By receiving the opening command, the sound emission control device 91 executes control for switching the effect in the opening / closing execution mode accordingly. After the special electricity winning device 53 is opened, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and the special electricity start process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” when the special electricity start process is executed, it becomes “4” after 1 is added.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electric power release opening process of step S310 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of one round game is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electric prize device 53 is closed and a close command is sent to the voice. Transmit to the light emission control device 91. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the closing time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and is specifically 1 sec longer than the firing period of the launch ball. When the special electricity prize winning device 53 is in the closed state, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the round counter is “0” or not. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity release process is executed is “4”, so “1” is added after 1 is added.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process in step S311 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special electricity closing process, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the special electric power closing process is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has elapsed, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened, and the opening / closing execution mode is executed in this time. The opening duration corresponding to the hit result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Further, when the special electric prize winning device 53 is in an open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity closing process is executed is “5”, it becomes “4” after 1 subtraction.

  On the other hand, when the round counter is “0”, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. The ending command is a command for recognizing that it is the timing at which the sound emission control device 91 starts an effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the voice light emission control device 91 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result triggered by the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information on the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the ROM 84 is read, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” when the special electricity closing process is executed, it becomes “6” after 1 is added.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special electric power end process of step S312 in the special graphic special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending time has passed. If the ending time has not passed, the special electric power end process is ended as it is. If the ending time has elapsed, set the contents of the success / failure lottery mode and support mode after the opening / closing execution mode to the contents corresponding to the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode, Further, after the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”, the special electricity termination process is terminated.

<Launching operation processing>
Next, the firing operation process executed by the launch control unit 179 of the power / fire control device 171 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not the ball is supplied by checking the state of the flag of the internal RAM provided in the launch control unit 179. In step S502, the state of the ball feeding state is also checked by checking the state of the flag. It is determined whether or not. The ball supply state is a state where the ball supply device 47 of the game ball launching mechanism 45 is in a driving state. The ball feeding state is a state where the ball feeding device 131 provided on the upper plate 33 is in a driving state.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S501 and step S502, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the launch permission signal received from the MPU 83 is at the HI level. In step S504, the state of the timer circuit provided in the firing control unit 179 is checked to confirm that the firing solenoid 48 is in a situation where the firing permission signal becomes HI level or the firing of the fired ball is continued. It is determined whether or not 0.6 sec or more has elapsed since the timing when was set to the previous driving state. If a negative determination is made in either step S503 or step S504, the main firing operation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in both step S503 and step S504, after setting the ball feeding state by setting the flag of the internal RAM of the firing control unit 179 in step S505, the present firing operation process is terminated. To do. When the ball feeding state is set, a driving signal is output to the ball feeding device 131 so that one take-in ball stored in the upper plate 33 is led out toward the take-out / discharge passage portion 141. .

  When the ball feeding state is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S502, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the ball feed detection sensor 142 provided in the intake / discharge passage portion 141 is ON. If it is not ON, the main firing operation process is terminated, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, the ball feeding state is canceled by clearing the flag of the internal RAM of the firing control unit 179. Thereafter, in step S508, after setting the ball supply state by setting the flag of the internal RAM of the launch control unit 179, the launch operation process is terminated. When the ball supply state is set, a drive signal is output to the ball supply device 47, so that the fired ball waiting in the supply passage unit 152 is supplied onto the fire rail 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 45. The

  When the ball supply state is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S501, and the process proceeds to step S509. In step S509, by checking the state of the timer circuit provided in the launch control unit 179, it is determined whether or not a supply time (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed since the ball supply state was set. The supply time is assumed as the time required for one shot ball waiting in the supply passage portion 152 to be supplied onto the discharge rail 46 after the ball supply device 47 is in the driving state. It is set as a time longer than the longest time.

  If the supply time has not elapsed, the main firing operation process is terminated as it is, and if the supply time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S510. In step S510, the ball supply state is canceled by clearing the flag of the internal RAM of the launch control unit 179. Thereafter, in step S511, the firing drive signal is output to the launch solenoid 48 of the game ball launch mechanism 45 in a single shot, and then the launch operation process is terminated. When the firing drive signal is output to the firing solenoid 48, the output shaft of the firing solenoid 48 protrudes, and when the output shaft collides with the fired ball on the firing rail 46, the fired ball is fired toward the game area PA. Is done. In this case, the firing intensity is determined according to the operation amount of the handle portion of the firing operation device 37.

  Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 17, the operation content for firing a shot ball toward the game area PA will be described. FIG. 17A shows the output state of the launch permission signal, FIG. 17B shows the launch cycle of the launch ball, FIG. 17C shows the operating state of the ball feeder 131, and FIG. Shows the detection state of the ball feed detection sensor 142, FIG. 17E shows the operation state of the ball supply device 47, and FIG. 17F shows the operation state of the firing solenoid.

  When a player performs a shooting operation on the shooting operation device 37 in a state where a take-in ball is stored in the upper plate 33, a shooting permission signal is output at a timing t1, as shown in FIG. The state becomes the HI level. After that, at the timing of t2, the firing cycle is reached as shown in FIG. 17B, so that the ball feeding device 131 is driven as shown in FIG. The take-in of the ball is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (d) at the timing of t3, the ball feed detection sensor 142 starts detecting one captured ball, and at the timing of t4 thereafter, FIG. 17 (c). As shown in FIG. 17, the driving state of the ball feeding device 131 is released, and the ball supply device 47 is in the driving state as shown in FIG. When the ball supply device 47 is in a driving state, one shot ball waiting in the supply passage portion 152 is supplied onto the discharge rail 46.

  Thereafter, when the supply time elapses at the timing of t5, the driving state of the ball supply device 47 is released as shown in FIG. 17 (e), and the firing solenoid 48 is driven as shown in FIG. 17 (f). It becomes a state. Thereby, the launch ball supplied on the launch rail 46 is launched toward the game area PA.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 17B, at a timing t6, in which the ball is stored in the upper plate 33 and the shooting operation by the player is continued with respect to the shooting operation device 37. When the firing period is reached, an operation similar to the operation shown at the timing t2 to the timing t5 is performed. Thereby, the launch ball is fired again toward the game area PA.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the take-in ball is taken in from the upper plate 33, a launch ball different from the take-in ball is supplied onto the launch rail 46, and the launch ball is launched toward the game area PA. As a result, a fraudulent sphere that is smaller than a regular launch ball, a fraud sphere coated with oil, a fraud sphere with a string, or the like is replenished to the upper plate 33 so as to be launched toward the game area PA. Even if an act is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a profit. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress an act of illegally generating a ball entering the general winning opening 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55.

  In this configuration, the player can replenish the take-in ball into the upper plate 33. Thereby, even if it is the structure from which a taking-in ball | bowl and a launch ball | bowl differ, it becomes possible to play a game with the same feeling as the existing pachinko machine.

  When the launch ball enters any of the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55, the take-in ball is paid out to the upper plate 33. Thereby, even if it is the structure from which a taking-in ball | bowl and a launch ball | bowl differ, it becomes possible to play a game with the same feeling as the existing pachinko machine.

  The taken-in ball taken in by the ball feeding device 131 is not used as a launch target of the game ball launching mechanism 45. As a result, it is possible to prevent such illegal balls from being launched toward the game area PA.

  The take-in ball taken in by the ball feeding device 131 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the take-out / discharge passage portion 141. As a result, even if the illegal ball as described above is replenished to the upper plate 33, it is possible to make it difficult for the pachinko machine 10 to use the illegal ball.

  By providing the recovery passage forming body 151, the supply passage portion 152, the foul ball recovery portion 154 and the transport device 155, the fired ball is circulated and used in the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, even if it tries to illegally insert into the pachinko machine 10 the above-mentioned illegal ball as a launch ball, it becomes difficult to do so. Moreover, since it is unlikely that the firing ball will disappear, it is easy to use an expensive material as the material of the firing ball.

  The material of the take-in ball and the launch ball is different. Thereby, it becomes possible to use a game ball appropriate for each of the capture ball and the launch ball. Specifically, by using soft iron as the take-in ball, it is possible to make it common with game balls used in existing pachinko machines, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable It becomes. On the other hand, by using brass or ceramic as the launch ball, it is possible to prevent the launch ball from being attracted by the magnet, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using the magnet.

  By operating the handle portion of the firing operation device 37, the ball feeding device 131 takes in the taken-in ball, and the ball feeding device 47 supplies the firing ball onto the firing rail 46 and the firing ball by the firing solenoid 48. Is fired. Thereby, even if the take-in ball is not used as a launch ball as it is, the player only has to perform a launch operation on the launch operation device 37 at the time of the game, so the operability is reduced compared to the existing pachinko machine It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while avoiding this.

  The upper plate 33 and the ball feeding device 131 are provided in the front door frame 14, whereas the intake / discharge passage portion 141 and the ball feeding detection sensor 142 are provided in the main body frame 13. As a result, the pachinko machine in which the take-in ball is directly used as the launch ball can be used in common with the front door frame 14, and the parts management can be suitably performed.

  The game ball launching mechanism 45 is provided on the entrance side of the guide rail of the game board 51 with respect to the intake / discharge passage portion 141. Thereby, even if it does not change the position of the ball feeder 131 provided in the front door frame 14 from the existing pachinko machine, the taking-in ball taken in by the ball feeder 131 is smoothly taken into the take-out / discharge passage portion 141. It can be derived.

  The launch solenoid 48 is mounted on the launch solenoid of an existing pachinko machine in which the take-in ball taken in by the ball feeder 131 is directly supplied onto the launch rail and the supplied take-in ball is launched as a launch ball by the launch solenoid. When the position is assumed, it is provided at a position that is coaxial with the launch solenoid of the existing pachinko machine and that is a launch destination side by the launch solenoid of the existing pachinko machine. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the structure of a guide rail common, and it becomes possible to use the existing pachinko machine and the game board 51 in common. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform component management suitably.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the handling of the launch ball is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the position where the firing solenoid is provided is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the launch solenoid 48 is provided below the game area PA. However, in this embodiment, the launch solenoid is provided at the upper left of the game area PA. And the ball entrance of the guide rail provided in the game board 51 exists in the direction side in which the output shaft of the launch solenoid projects with respect to the launch solenoid, and the launch ball is directed to the right from the launch solenoid. Will be fired. In this case, the firing solenoid is not provided on the game board 51 but on the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13. Therefore, it is possible to replace the game board 51 with the firing solenoid mounted on the resin base 41.

  In addition to the launch solenoid, the resin base 41 holds a launch ball fired by the launch solenoid and guides the fired launch ball toward the ball entrance of the guide rail. A ball supply device is provided for supplying one shot ball on the launch rail when one fetch ball is taken in through the ball feeder 131. A game ball stored in the tank 121 of the back pack unit 15 is supplied to the ball supply device as a shot ball through the launch supply passage. The launch supply passage section may be configured to directly connect the tank 121 and the ball supply device, or may be configured to directly connect the tank rail 122 and the ball supply device. Good.

  In the above configuration, when a launch operation is performed on the launch operation device 37 in a state where the take-in ball is stored in the upper plate 33, the fetch ball is first taken in by the ball feeding device 131. The captured ball is detected by the ball feed detection sensor 142 and then discharged to a ball circulation device provided in the island facility of the game hall. When the captured ball is detected by the ball feed detection sensor 142, one shot ball supplied from the tank 121 via the launch supply passage is supplied onto the launch rail by the ball supply device. Then, when the output shaft of the launch solenoid protrudes, the launch ball supplied on the launch rail is launched toward the game area PA. The launch ball discharged from the game area PA is discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility through a discharge passage portion provided in the pachinko machine.

  Here, game balls are supplied to the tank 121 from the ball circulation device of the island facility, as in the first embodiment. Further, as described above, the taken-in ball taken in through the ball feeding device 131 passes through the take-out / discharge passage portion 141 and is discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility, and the fired ball discharged from the game area PA is also the island facility. Discharged into the ball circulation device. Therefore, in this pachinko machine, the take-in ball and the launch ball are the same. The same game ball may be made of soft iron or the like and may be attracted by a magnet, or may be made of brass or ceramic or the like and cannot be attracted by a magnet. Good.

  Even if the take-in ball and the launch ball have the same configuration, the take-in ball taken in by the ball feeding device 131 can be circulated by the ball circulation device of the island facility and replenished to the tank 121 to become a launch ball. Furthermore, since there are many pachinko machines in the game hall, the captured ball captured by one pachinko machine is not used as the launch ball of the pachinko machine, but as a launch ball of another pachinko machine. May be used. Then, illegal spheres with a diameter smaller than regular spheres, illegal spheres coated with oil, etc., illegal spheres with strings, etc. are taken in as captured spheres and finally launched into the game area PA. Even if an attempt is made to perform an act, if a captured ball is taken in, the ball used as the launch ball is not the captured ball, so an illegal profit may be obtained by the act It becomes difficult.

  In the configuration in which the game balls stored in the tank 121 are supplied as the launch balls, if the game balls are not properly replenished to the tank 121 from the ball circulation device of the island facility, the launch of the launch balls is forced. It will be stopped. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it can be visually confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether or not there are insufficient launch balls, and the launch balls are waiting in the supply passage section for launch. Can be detected.

  In detail about the structure that can be visually confirmed, the passage wall of the supply passage portion for launch is formed to be colored transparent or colorless and transparent so that the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed, and in the resin base 41 and the game board 51 At least a portion located in front of the launching supply passage portion is also formed to be colored transparent or colorless and transparent so that the inside of the launching supply passage portion can be visually confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the launch ball is waiting in the launch supply passage section through the window panel 22.

  In detail about the configuration that can detect that the launch ball is waiting in the launch supply passage portion, the launch supply passage portion is provided with a standby detection sensor that detects that the launch ball is waiting. Yes. As a detection result of the standby detection sensor, a known magnetic detection type proximity sensor is used, and a change in the magnetic field due to the passage of the through-hole into the ball is converted into an electric signal and output to the main controller 81. To do. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when no firing ball is detected, and an HI level signal is output when a firing ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a firing ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a firing ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting. Moreover, it is not limited to a proximity sensor, You may use other sensors, such as an optical sensor.

  When the MPU 83 of the main control device 81 specifies that the launch ball is not waiting in the launch supply passage portion based on the detection result of the standby detection sensor, an affirmative determination is made in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). To stop the progress of the game. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped is canceled when the detection result of the standby detection sensor is a result of detecting the shot ball. Then, when the release is made, the state of the pachinko machine is restored to the state before the progress of the game is stopped. Thereby, even if the firing of the fired ball is forcibly stopped due to a shortage of the ball in the tank 121 or the like, the disadvantage suffered by the player can be suppressed.

  Instead of the configuration in which the standby detection sensor is provided in the launch supply passage portion, the detection is detected in the tank 121 in the configuration in which the launch supply passage portion is provided so as to directly connect the tank 121 and the ball supply device. A configuration in which a sensor is provided, or a configuration in which a detection sensor is provided in the tank rail 122 in a configuration in which the launch supply passage portion is provided so as to directly connect the tank rail 122 and the ball supply device, is provided. Also good. Further, in the configuration in which the launch supply passage portion is provided so as to directly connect the case rail 123 and the ball supply device, the ball non-detection sensor 123a may also be used as a standby detection sensor.

  Further, when the progress of the game is stopped due to the shortage of the shot balls, it is possible to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and then turn it on again in order to release the stopped state. . Even in this case, when the power is turned on again, the RAM 85 or the like of the main control device 81 is not cleared, so that the state before the progress of the game is stopped is restored. It is preferable that

  The configuration of this embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 18 is a front view of the main body frame 13 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 18, a game ball launching mechanism 211 for launching a shot ball into the game area PA is provided at the upper left of the game area PA, and fires the shot ball from the upper left position toward the right. . The game ball launching mechanism 211 has a launch rail 212 that extends toward the introduction port 222 that opens the game area PA outward at a position on the upper left of the game area PA in the partition rail portion 221 that partitions the game area PA. A ball supply device 213 that supplies a launch ball onto the rail 212 and a launch solenoid 214 that is an electric actuator that launches the launch ball supplied onto the launch rail 212 toward the introduction port 222 are provided. The ball feeding device 131 is driven and controlled based on the turning operation of the launch operation device 37 provided on the front door frame 14, and one ball is detected by the ball feeding detection sensor 142. One launch ball is supplied onto the launch rail 212 by the feeder 213. In this state, the firing solenoid 214 is driven and controlled so that the output shaft protrudes, whereby the firing ball supplied on the firing rail 212 is launched toward the game area PA. The launch rail 212 is provided so that the upper surface thereof is horizontal, and the launch ball supplied to the end on the launch source side in the launch rail 212 is prevented from rolling to the game area PA side by its own weight. ing.

  The game ball launching mechanism 211 is provided on the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13 and is not provided on the game board 51. Specifically, a window hole 43 is formed in the resin base 41 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a game board 51 is mounted on the back side of the resin base 41 so as to close the window hole 43 from the rear. ing. In this state, the game area PA formed on the game board 51 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 13 through the window hole 43. The game ball launching mechanism 211 is fixed from the front side of the resin base 41, and the launching rail 212 protrudes from the peripheral portion of the window hole 43 toward the window hole 43 on the firing direction front side. And the division rail part 221 is discontinuous in the position where this firing rail 212 protrudes, and the said firing rail 212 has entered the inlet 222 side of the division rail part 221. Thereby, the fired ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism 211 is reliably introduced into the game area PA.

  Even if the launch rail 212 protrudes toward the window hole 43, the launch rail 212 is not fixed to the game board 51, and the launch rail 212 exists in front of the game board 51. On the other hand, the game board 51 is fixed from the back side of the resin base 41. Therefore, it is possible to replace the game board 51 while the game ball launching mechanism 211 is mounted on the resin base 41.

  A game ball stored in the tank 121 of the back pack unit 15 is supplied as a launch ball to the ball supply device 213 of the game ball launching mechanism 211. Specifically, a launch supply passage portion 215 is provided so as to connect the ball supply device 213 and the tank 121. The launch supply passage portion 215 is formed so as to feed the fire balls one by one to the ball feeder 213 while aligning a plurality of fire balls in a row. The ball supply device 213 supplies the shot balls arranged in a line in the launch supply passage portion 215 one by one onto the launch rail 212.

  The portion of the passage wall that divides the firing supply passage portion 215 that generates at least the front surface portion of the resin base 41 can be visually confirmed from the front of the main body frame 13 in the firing supply passage portion 215. It is formed so as to be transparent. Further, the portion of the launch supply passage 215 that is formed transparently exists at a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 of the front door frame 14. Thus, by visually checking the launch supply passage portion 215 from the front of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to confirm whether or not the launch ball is waiting in the launch supply passage portion 215.

  The launch supply passage portion 215 is provided with a standby detection sensor 216 for detecting whether or not a launch ball is waiting. The standby detection sensor 216 is a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range is detected and output as an electric signal. The standby detection sensor 216 is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. The standby detection sensor 216 outputs an electrical signal to the main controller 81. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. The output level relationship may be reversed. The main control device 81 uses the detection result of the standby detection sensor 216 to execute a monitoring process as to whether or not a game ball is waiting in the launch supply passage 215.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  A game ball is supplied to the tank 121 of the payout mechanism 102 from a ball circulation device in the island facility of the game hall. This game ball is supplied to the upper plate 33 as a take-in ball when the payout device 124 operates. The take-in ball supplied to the upper plate 33 is guided toward the downstream side through the ball feeder 131. The configurations of the upper plate 33 and the ball feeding device 131 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  A no-ball detecting sensor 226 is provided in the payout supply passage 225 for supplying the game balls stored in the tank 121 to the payout device 124. The no-ball detection sensor 226 is a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range is detected and output as an electric signal. The no-ball detection sensor 226 is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and any sensor can be used as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. . The no-ball detection sensor 226 outputs an electrical signal to the payout controller 161. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. The output level relationship may be reversed. The payout control device 161 uses the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor 226 to determine whether or not a game ball is waiting in the supply passage portion 225 for payout. The error notification is executed by transmitting an error command to the control device 81, and the operation of the dispensing device 124 is stopped. This error state is automatically canceled when the detection of a game ball is resumed by the no-ball detection sensor 226, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration that requires the power of the pachinko machine 10 to be turned on again. Alternatively, the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 may be configured to require an operation of an operation unit that can be operated when opened.

  The take-in ball derived toward the downstream side by the ball feeding device 131 is not supplied onto the firing rail 212 of the game ball launching mechanism 211 but is taken in / out formed on the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13. It is supplied to the passage part 141. The configuration of the intake / discharge passage 141 is the same as that of the first embodiment. The ball feeding device passing through the take-in / discharge passage portion 141 is detected one by one by the ball feed detection sensor 142, and the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 211 is detected by detecting the ball taken in by the ball feed detection sensor 142. 213 is driven to supply a single launch ball on the launch rail 212. This launch ball is supplied from the tank 121 through the launch supply passage 215 as already described. Then, when the launch solenoid 214 is driven, the launch ball supplied on the launch rail 212 is launched toward the game area PA.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the standby ball monitoring process executed by the MPU 83 of the main control device 81. The standby ball monitoring process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the standby detection sensor 216 is ON. If it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S602, and after the value of the standby detection counter provided in the RAM 85 of the main controller 81 is cleared to “0”, the standby ball monitoring process is terminated. The standby detection counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the MPU 83 has confirmed that the standby detection sensor 216 is ON.

  If the standby detection sensor 216 is ON (step S601: YES), 1 is added to the value of the standby detection counter in the RAM 85 in step S603. In a succeeding step S604, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby detection counter after the addition of 1 is 2 or more. If it is less than 2, the standby ball monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if it is 2 or more, the process proceeds to step S605.

  In step S605, a standby error state is set by executing a flag setting process provided in the RAM 85. In the standby error state, an affirmative determination is made in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), and execution of the process for advancing the game is prohibited. For example, the launch of the game ball is stopped when the launch control process of step S212 is not executed, and the progress of the game times and the progress of the opening / closing execution mode are stopped when the special figure special electric control process of step S214 is not executed. The

  Then, after transmitting a standby error command to the sound emission control device 91 in step S606, the standby ball monitoring process is terminated. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 91 turns on the display light emitting unit 23 in a predetermined manner and outputs a notification sound from the speaker unit 26. In addition, when receiving the above command, the sound emission control device 91 transmits a command corresponding to the command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 displays the notification image on the symbol display device 61 by receiving the command. Note that the notification mode in the case of the standby error state is not limited to the above, and instead of performing all of the above notification modes, only a part may be performed. For example, a notification signal may be output to the outside.

  The standby error state is canceled when the detection result of the standby detection sensor 216 is a result of detecting a shot ball. And at the time of the cancellation | release, the state of the pachinko machine 10 will return to the state before stopping progress of a game. In order to realize the configuration, the timer interrupt process is a process for monitoring the detection result of the standby detection sensor 216 and canceling the standby error state when the detection result of the standby detection sensor 216 is turned on. It must be executed at a timing prior to step S206 in FIG.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since the game ball launching mechanism 211 is provided at the upper left of the game area PA, even if the launch intensity of the launch ball by the launch solenoid 214 is lower than before, It becomes possible to introduce into the area PA. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the firing solenoid 214.

  Even if the game ball launching mechanism 211 is provided at the upper left of the game area PA, the game ball launching mechanism 211 is provided on the resin base 41 of the main body frame 13, and when the game board 51 is replaced. The removal of the game ball launching mechanism 211 is not necessary. Thereby, it is possible to provide the game ball launching mechanism 211 at the upper left of the game area PA without reducing the replacement work of the game board 51.

  A game ball stored in the tank 121 in a configuration in which the take-in ball taken in from the upper plate 33 is discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility and the game ball is supplied from the ball circulation device to the tank 121. Is supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 211 and supplied to the upper plate 33. That is, the capture ball and the launch ball are the same. However, even if the take-in ball and the launch ball are the same in this way, the take-in ball taken in by the ball feeding device 131 is circulated by the ball circulation device of the island facility and replenished to the tank 121. Can be a launch ball. Furthermore, since there are many pachinko machines in the game hall, the captured ball captured by one pachinko machine is not used as the launch ball of the pachinko machine, but as a launch ball of another pachinko machine. May be used. Then, illegal spheres with a diameter smaller than regular spheres, illegal spheres coated with oil, etc., illegal spheres with strings, etc. are taken in as captured spheres and finally launched into the game area PA. Even if an attempt is made to perform an act, if a captured ball is taken in, the ball used as the launch ball is not the captured ball, so an illegal profit may be obtained by the act It becomes difficult.

  In the configuration in which the game ball stored in the tank 121 is supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 211 as a launch ball, the portion that generates at least the front surface portion of the resin base 41 among the passage walls that define the launch supply passage portion 215 is: It is formed to be transparent so as to make it possible to visually confirm the launch ball present in the launch supply passage portion 215 from the front of the main body frame 13. Further, the portion of the launch supply passage 215 that is formed transparently exists at a position that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 of the front door frame 14. Thus, by visually checking the launch supply passage portion 215 from the front of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to confirm whether or not the launch ball is waiting in the launch supply passage portion 215.

  In addition, a standby detection sensor 216 is provided in the launch supply passage 215, and the detection result of the standby detection sensor 216 is a detection result in which the launch ball is not waiting in the launch supply passage 215. The game is stopped and error notification is executed. And when the said error state is cancelled | released, the state of the pachinko machine 10 will return to the state before the start of an error state. Accordingly, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to deal with a state in which the launch ball is not waiting in the launch supply passage portion 215 without causing any disadvantage to the player.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the handling of the launch ball is different from that in the first embodiment, and the capture ball is not captured, but the launch ball is within the range of the usable number stored in the storage medium. It is configured to allow launching. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the position where the firing solenoid is provided is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the launch solenoid 48 is provided below the game area PA. However, in this embodiment, the launch solenoid is provided at the upper left of the game area PA. And the ball entrance of the guide rail provided in the game board 51 exists in the direction side in which the output shaft of the launch solenoid projects with respect to the launch solenoid, and the launch ball is directed to the right from the launch solenoid. Will be fired. In this case, the firing solenoid is not provided in the game board 51 but is provided in the main body base. Therefore, it is possible to replace the game board 51 with the firing solenoid mounted on the main body base.

  The ball supply device is supplied with the launch ball discharged from the game area PA. Specifically, the configuration for circulating the firing ball is provided with a collection passage in the back of the main body base and the game board 51 as in the first embodiment, and is discharged from the game area PA. The fired ball is collected by the collection passage. A transport device is provided between the recovery passage and the ball supply device, and the fired balls recovered by the recovery passage are supplied to the ball supply device by the transport device.

  In the configuration in which the projecting balls circulate as described above, the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 are not provided in the present embodiment, and the payout mechanism 102 is not provided. Instead, a storage medium capable of storing the number of usable firing balls can be inserted, and the firing balls can be fired within the range of the usable number stored in the storage medium. In addition, when a winning ball is generated by winning at any one of the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55, the number of the winning balls is the number of shot balls. It is added as a usable number.

  According to the above configuration, the launch ball is circulated and used in the pachinko machine as in the first embodiment, and it is impossible to throw the illegal ball into the pachinko machine as the launch ball. It is possible to prevent fraud that has been used. In addition, since the number of usable launch balls is managed by the storage medium, the total number of game balls required in the game hall can be suppressed.

  Here, both the pachinko machine of the present embodiment and the pachinko machine of the second embodiment are configured such that a launch ball is launched from the upper left of the game area PA. Accordingly, the game board 51 can be commonly used in these pachinko machines.

  The configuration of this embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 21 is a front view of the pachinko machine 310 in the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 310 is a so-called enclosed game machine (enclosed ball game machine, enclosed pachinko machine, enclosed ball pachinko machine).

  As shown in FIG. 21, the pachinko machine 310 includes an outer frame 311 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 310, and a gaming machine main body 312 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 311 in the forward direction. When the pachinko machine 310 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 311 is fixed to a so-called island facility of the game hall by a nail or the like.

  The gaming machine main body 312 includes a main body base 321 and a front door 322 disposed in front of the main body base 321. A main body base 321 of the gaming machine main body 312 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 311 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. The front door 322 is rotatably supported by the main body base 321, and can be rotated forward with the same side as the side on which the main body base 321 is supported with respect to the outer frame 311 as a support side. Has been.

  The gaming machine main body 312 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 312 to the outer frame 311 so that it cannot be opened. The door 322 has a function of locking the main body base 321 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 323 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 310 using an unlocking key.

  Specifically, the locking device and the cylinder lock 323 are provided on the main body base 321. The surface of the cylinder lock 323 where the key hole is formed is exposed to the front surface of the pachinko machine 310 through the exposure recess 324 formed in the front door 322. Further, the front door 322 is provided with a front hook hook portion (not shown) protruding rearward, and when the front door 322 is closed, the front hook hook portion is received by the front hook receiving portion of the locking device. As a result, the front door 322 is locked to the main body base 321. Then, when the unlocking key is inserted into the cylinder lock 323 and rotated in a predetermined direction, the front hook receiving portion is displaced in the unlocking direction, and the engagement state between the front hook receiving portion and the front hook hook portion is released. Is done. Thereby, the locked state of the front door 322 with respect to the main body base 321 is cancelled | released.

  On the other hand, the locking device is provided with a rear hook hook portion (not shown) protruding rearward, and in the state where the main body base 321 is closed, the rear hook hook portion is a rear hook receiving portion of the outer frame 311. The main body base 321 is locked to the outer frame 311 by being received by the part. Then, by inserting an unlocking key into the cylinder lock 323 and rotating it in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rear hook hook portion is displaced in the unlocking direction, and the rear hook hook portion and the rear hook receiver The engagement state with the part is released. As a result, the locked state of the main body base 321 with respect to the outer frame 311 is released.

  FIG. 22 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front door 322 removed. As shown in FIG. 22, the main body base 321 includes a support base body 331 formed of a synthetic resin. The support base body 331 has a horizontal dimension substantially the same as the horizontal dimension of the outer frame 311, and the vertical dimension of the outer base frame 311 extends from the upper surface of the lower frame part 311 a to the upper edge of the upper frame part 311 b. It is substantially the same as the height dimension up to. Therefore, when the main body base 321 is closed to the outer frame 311, the back surface of the main body base 321 overlaps the upper frame portion 311 b and the left and right side frame portions 311 c and 311 d of the outer frame 311 from the front.

  The support base body 331 has an exposure hole 332 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The game board 51 is mounted on the support base body 331 from the back side so as to be exposed to the front side of the support base body 331 through the exposure hole 332. Since the configuration of the game board 51 is the same as that of the first embodiment except for the configuration of the guide rail that guides the shot ball toward the game area PA, a specific description is omitted here.

  A game ball launching mechanism 211 for launching the shot ball into the game area PA is provided at the upper left of the game area PA, and is provided so as to fire the shot ball from the upper left position toward the right. The game ball launching mechanism 211 has a launch rail 212 that extends toward the introduction port 222 that opens the game area PA outward at a position on the upper left of the game area PA in the partition rail portion 221 that partitions the game area PA. A ball supply device 213 that supplies a launch ball onto the rail 212 and a launch solenoid 214 that is an electric actuator that launches the launch ball supplied onto the launch rail 212 toward the introduction port 222 are provided. One launch ball is supplied onto the launch rail 212 by the ball supply device 213 based on the turning operation of the launch operation device 336 provided on the front door 322. In this state, the firing solenoid 214 is driven and controlled so that the output shaft protrudes, whereby the firing ball supplied on the firing rail 212 is launched toward the game area PA.

  The game ball launching mechanism 211 is provided on the support base body 331 of the main body base 321 and is not provided on the game board 51. More specifically, an exposure hole 332 is formed in the support base body 331 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the exposure hole 332 is closed from the rear side so as to close the back surface side of the support base body 331. A game board 51 is installed. In this state, the game area PA formed on the game board 51 is exposed to the front side of the main body base 321 through the exposure hole 332. The game ball launching mechanism 211 is fixed from the front side of the support base body 331, and the firing rail 212 protrudes from the peripheral portion of the exposure hole 332 toward the exposure hole 332 side on the firing direction front side. And the division rail part 221 is discontinuous in the position where this firing rail 212 protrudes, and the said firing rail 212 has entered the inlet 222 side of the division rail part 221. Thereby, the fired ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism 211 is reliably introduced into the game area PA.

  Even if the launch rail 212 protrudes toward the exposure hole 332, the launch rail 212 is not fixed to the game board 51, and the launch rail 212 exists in front of the game board 51. On the other hand, the game board 51 is fixed from the back side of the support base body 331. Therefore, it is possible to replace the game board 51 with the game ball launching mechanism 211 mounted on the support base body 331.

  The support base body 331 is provided with a launch ball detection sensor 384 for detecting the launch ball supplied on the launch rail 212 and a reader device 385 for reading ID information from the launch ball.

  The launch ball detection sensor 384 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a launch ball detection signal to detect the launch ball in a situation where the launch ball is detected. In a situation where there is not, a LOW level signal is output as a shot ball detection signal. Thus, the fire ball detection sensor 384 can identify that a fire ball has been supplied on the fire rail 212 and that the supplied fire ball has been fired.

  The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launch ball detection sensor 384 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method. However, in order not to adversely affect the reading of the ID information in the reader device 385, the firing ball detection sensor 384 is preferably a sensor that does not generate much magnetic field. These sensors are preferred. Details of the reader device 385 will be described later.

  A game ball stored in a circulation storage tank 231 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine main body 312 is supplied to the ball supply device 213 of the game ball launching mechanism 211 as a launch ball. Specifically, a launch supply passage portion 215 is provided so as to connect the ball supply device 213 and the circulation storage tank 231. The launch supply passage portion 215 is formed so as to feed the fire balls one by one to the ball feeder 213 while aligning a plurality of fire balls in a row.

  At least the front surface of the support base body 331 in the passage wall that divides the launch supply passage portion 215 is visually confirmed from the front of the main body base 321 in the launch supply passage portion 215. It is made transparent so as to make it possible. Further, the portion of the launch supply passage 215 that is formed transparently exists at a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 310 through the window panel 352 of the front door 322. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the launch ball is waiting in the launch supply passage portion 215 by visually confirming the launch supply passage portion 215 from the front of the pachinko machine 310.

  The launch supply passage portion 215 is provided with a standby detection sensor 216 for detecting whether or not a launch ball is waiting. The standby detection sensor 216 is a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range is detected and output as an electric signal. The standby detection sensor 216 is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. The standby detection sensor 216 outputs an electrical signal to the main controller 361. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. The output level relationship may be reversed. The main control device 361 monitors whether or not the game ball is waiting in the launch supply passage section 215 by executing the standby ball monitoring process (FIG. 20) as in the second embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 310, as in the first embodiment, the shot ball discharged from the game area PA is not discharged outside the pachinko machine 310, but is circulated in the pachinko machine 310 and used again as a shot ball. Is done. A configuration for circulating the firing ball in this way will be described in detail.

  The launch ball that is launched by the game ball launching mechanism 211 and reaches the game area PA flows down the game area PA while bouncing back to the nail 59 or the windmill. Then, the launch ball that has entered the general winning opening 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, or the out port 58 is guided to the back side of the game board 51.

  A recovery passage portion 232 is provided on the back surface of the support base body 331 and the game board 51 of the main body base 321, and the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55 or the out The launch ball that has entered the mouth 58 is collected by the collection passage 232. The bottom of the recovery passage 232 is inclined downward toward one end in the lateral direction, and the firing ball recovered in the recovery passage 232 is conveyed to the circulation storage tank 231 at the end on the inclined tip side. A transfer device 233 is provided. The transport device 233 transports the fire balls collected by the collection passage unit 232 one by one to the circulation storage tank 231.

  The conveying device 233 is provided with a ball polishing device 234. The ball polishing device 234 includes a ball polishing body and a polishing drive unit. The ball polishing body is a brush-like long and thin member, and is provided so as to be coaxial with the conveying device 233. The ball polishing body is supported so as to be rotatable about its axis, and one end in the longitudinal direction is connected to the polishing drive unit via a link mechanism. The polishing drive unit is composed of a rotary motor, and the ball polishing body continues to rotate in a predetermined direction while a drive signal is supplied. The polishing drive unit is electrically connected to the payout control device 364, and the drive signal is continuously supplied to the polishing drive unit while operating power is supplied to the payout control device 364. The operation of the part is continued.

  In the configuration in which the ball polishing device 234 is provided in the transfer device 233, the ball polishing device 234 enables the transfer ball 234 to be transferred to the circulation storage tank 231 by the transfer device 233, and the shot ball to be transferred is used. The size and arrangement position are set so that the brush part of the ball polished body comes into contact. Accordingly, the fired ball transported by the transport device 233 is guided to the circulation storage tank 231 and is polished by the ball polishing body at the time of the guide.

  As described above, by providing the circulation storage tank 231, the collection passage 232, and the transfer device 233, the fired ball circulates inside the pachinko machine 310. Further, the number of circulating launch balls is a plurality of predetermined numbers so that the launch balls supplied from the ball supply device 213 onto the launch rail 212 are not lost even if the launch of the launch balls continues. The number is 100 (for example, 100). As a result, when the operation of the firing operation device 336 is continued in a situation where the value of the remaining sphere information described later is 1 or more, the firing of the fired ball is continued.

  A front door 322 is provided so as to cover the front surface of the support base body 331. As shown in FIG. 21, the front door 322 is formed with a window portion 351 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 351 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 352 is fitted therein. The window panel 352 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with a synthetic resin. Incidentally, the display surface of the symbol display device 61 and the special figure unit 62 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 310 through the window panel 352.

  Various light emitting units 353 and 354 are provided around the window 351. As part of the various light emitting units 353 and 354, an abnormality notifying light emitting unit 353 is provided above the window 351. In addition, a pair of left and right effect light emitting units 354 are provided on both left and right sides of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 353. In addition, a speaker device 338 is provided below the window 351 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation.

  On the lower right side of the front door 322, a firing operation device 336 is provided so as to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 310. The firing operation device 336 includes an operation base 336a provided to project forward, and an operation handle 336b provided to be rotatably supported by the operation base 336a. The operation handle 336b is operated to rotate. As a result, the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 211 is adjusted. The launch operation device 336 includes a touch sensor 336c for detecting that the operation handle 336b is touched by the player, a variable resistor 336d for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 336b, A stop switch 336e that is operated to stop the launch of the game ball even when the operation handle 336b is operated by the player is provided. In the situation where the operation handle 336b is disposed at the initial position, the stop switch 336e is automatically turned ON by the operation handle 336b.

  When a game ball is launched based on a launch operation by a player, both conditions that the touch sensor 336c detects that the operation handle 336b is touched and the stop switch 336e is not turned on are both conditions. When established, a game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation detected through the variable resistor 336d.

  As described above, the front door 322 is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the main body base 321, but the front door 322 is opened to the support base body 331 of the main body base 321 as shown in FIG. An open detection switch 339 for detecting whether or not the terminal is closed (or whether or not the terminal is closed) is provided. The opening detection switch 339 has a pin that can be projected and retracted from the front surface of the support base body 331. When the front door 322 is closed in the main body base 321, the pin is pushed to detect the closing of the front door 322. In the state where the door 322 is opened, the pin returns to the protruding position, and the opening of the front door 322 is detected.

  Incidentally, the opening detection switch 339 outputs an HI level opening detection signal to a main control device 361 described later when the front door 322 is in an open state, and the LOW level to the main control device 361 when the front door 322 is in a closed state. However, the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

<Composition concerning lending of launch ball and provision of storage medium M>
Next, the configuration relating to the rental of the launch ball and the provision of the storage medium M will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this pachinko machine 310, instead of renting an actual launch ball for cash input by a player, information on the number of launch balls that can be used for the inserted cash is stored internally. The configuration is such that the launch ball can be used within the range of the memorized number. In addition, when a winning corresponding to the grant of the launch ball occurs, the actual game ball is not given, but information on the number of the launch balls corresponding to the win is stored internally and stored. A number of launch balls can be used. In addition, when it is desired that the stored information on the number of shot balls is given as an actual game value, the storage medium M on which the stored information on the number of shot balls is stored to the player Provided.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a management unit 431 is provided on the side of the outer frame 11 as an apparatus for performing the above-described cash insertion, storage medium M insertion, and storage medium M provision. . On the front side of the management unit 431, there are a cash inlet 432 into which banknotes are inserted as cash, a medium inlet 433 into which the storage medium M is inserted, and a medium outlet 434 through which the storage medium M is discharged. It is provided in this order. In the management unit 431, a process for identifying a bill inserted from the cash slot 432, a process for outputting the information to the pachinko machine 310, a process for identifying the storage medium M loaded from the medium slot 433, and the information A process of outputting the information to the machine 310, a process of writing the information to the storage medium M in response to a write instruction of the number of shot balls from the pachinko machine 310, and discharging the storage medium M having the information written from the medium discharge port 434. Execute processing. Details of these processes will be described later.

  When cash is inserted into the management unit 431, an operation for instructing to convert the cash information into information on the number of usable launch balls, and information on unused cash and available launch balls An operation for instructing to discharge the number of pieces of information as the storage medium M is performed on the operation unit 441 provided in the pachinko machine 310. As shown in FIG. 21, the operation unit 441 is provided below the window portion 351 in the front door 322.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the operation unit 441 includes, as various operation buttons 442 to 446, a ball supply button 442, a full return button 443, an increase instruction button 444, a decrease instruction button 445, and a partial return decision. A button 446 is provided. Further, as the various display units 447 and 448, a frequency display unit 447 and a remaining number display unit 448 are provided.

  In the frequency display portion 447, information on the inserted and unused cash is displayed. For example, “100” is displayed when 10,000 yen is unused, and “10” is displayed when 10,000 yen is unused. The remaining number display portion 448 displays information on the number of usable launch balls. For example, “10000” is displayed when the information on the number of usable launch balls is 10,000, and “1000” is displayed when the number is 1000.

  The ball supply button 442 is operated to convert the frequency information into information on the number of available launch balls. In this case, the frequency information that can be converted with respect to a single operation of the ball supply button 442 is limited to a predetermined frequency (that is, a predetermined amount of cash). Specifically, the frequency information for 500 yen can be used. It is converted into information on the number of spheres (for example, 125 pieces).

  The all return button 443 is operated to discharge the frequency information stored in the pachinko machine 310 and the information on the number of usable launch balls as the storage medium M. The increase instruction button 444, the decrease instruction button 445, and the partial return determination button 446 are operated so as to eject a part of the information as the storage medium M out of the information on the number of usable launch balls. In this case, when the increase instruction button 444 is operated, information on the number of fired balls to be discharged increases, and when the decrease instruction button 445 is operated, information on the number of fired balls to be discharged is displayed. If the determination button 446 for partial return is operated, the selected number of pieces of information are ejected as the storage medium M.

  Although not shown, on the back side of the main body base 321, a main control device 361 having a function for controlling the main game, and a sound emission for performing sound output control and light emission control based on a command from the main control device 361 A control device 362; a display control device 363 that performs display control of the symbol display device 61 based on a command from the sound emission control device 362; a payout control device 364 that performs control related to lending of game balls and giving of game value; A launch control device 365 that controls the launch of the sphere, and a first power supply device 366 and a second power supply device 367 that supply power to the various control devices 361 to 365 are provided. Among these, the main control device 361, the sound emission control device 362, the display control device 363, and the first power supply device 366 are mounted on the back surface of the game board 51, and the game board 51 is separated from the support base body 331. When removed, these devices 361 to 363 and 366 follow the game board 51 side.

  On the other hand, the payout control device 364, the launch control device 365, and the second power supply device 367 are mounted on the back surface of the support base body 331. Even if the game board 51 is removed from the support base body 331, these devices 364 are provided. 365 and 367 remain on the support base body 331 side. In this case, the launch control device 365 and the payout control device 364 are mounted in a stacked manner in front and back. Specifically, the launch control device 365 is mounted on the back surface of the support base body 331, and the payout control device 364 is thereafter It is installed in the direction. Accordingly, the payout control device 364 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 310 with respect to other control devices such as the main control device 361 and the launch control device 365.

  Here, the various control devices 361 to 365 and the power supply devices 366 and 367 are configured such that corresponding substrates are accommodated in a substrate box. In detail about the main control device 361 and the payout control device 364, the main control device 361 includes a main control board (not shown), and the main control board is accommodated in a board box. The payout control device 364 includes a payout control board (not shown), and the payout control board is accommodated in a board box. These substrate boxes are formed transparent so that the corresponding substrate can be visually confirmed from the outside of the substrate box. Further, the main controller 361 is provided with a first erasing button 361b and a second erasing button 361c on the surface that faces the back of the pachinko machine 310 when the main body base 321 is closed to the outer frame 311. .

  The substrate box is preferably provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are joined in an inseparable manner, and a construction of a joining portion (crimping portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer remains to be bonded at the time of peeling. A configuration is possible in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 310>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 310 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 361 includes a main control board 451 that controls the main control of the game, a first power failure monitoring board 455 that monitors the supply status of power from the first power supply device 366, and an outside of the board box in the main control device 361. A first erasing button 361b and a second erasing button 361c provided so as to be able to be pressed are provided.

  An MPU 452 is mounted on the main control board 451. The MPU 452 incorporates a ROM 453 and a RAM 454.

  The ROM 453 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 453 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 452 and fixed value data. The RAM 454 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. When the data capacity is compared, the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 453. The RAM 454 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 453. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 452 or the main control board 451 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The MPU 452 is provided with an input port and an output port. A first power failure monitoring board 455, a first erase button 361b, and a second erase button 361c provided in the main controller 361 are connected to the input side of the MPU 452.

  The first power failure monitoring board 455 relays between the main control board 451 and the first power supply device 366, and further monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the first power supply device 366. When the monitoring voltage becomes less than 5 volts, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 452 on the assumption that a power failure has occurred in the first power supply device 366.

  The first power supply device 366 is connected to the commercial power supply of the game hall, and supplies operating power to the electric equipment mounted on the game board 51 in the pachinko machine 310. Specifically, the first power supply device 366 is connected to the main control device 361, the sound emission control device 91, the display control device 96, the various drive units 53 b and 55 b and the various display units 62 a and 63 a mounted on the game board 51. Supply operating power.

  The first power supply 366 has backup power to the RAM 454 so that the RAM 454 can store data even when the supply of operating power from the commercial power supply to the first power supply 366 is stopped. A power supply unit for power interruption (not shown) is provided. The power supply unit for power interruption is a rechargeable type such as a capacitor, and charging is performed when operating power is supplied from the commercial power supply to the first power supply device 366. Data is stored and held in the RAM 454 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days) even during a power outage due to backup power from the power supply unit for power interruption.

  In addition to the electric devices mounted on the game board 51, the electric devices such as various light emitting units 353 and 354 and the operation unit 441 provided on the front door 322 are targets to which the first power supply device 366 supplies operating power. It is good also as the structure contained.

  The first erasing button 361b and the second erasing button 361c are operated when clearing data in the RAM 454 and data in the RAM 464 of the payout control device 364 described later.

  In addition to the above, various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 341a to 345a and an open detection switch 339 are connected to the input side of the MPU 452. The various winning detection sensors 341a to 345a are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning-corresponding balls such as the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56. The detected sensors are included, and the MPU 452 performs a winning determination for each winning portion. In addition, the MPU 452 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 54 and executes various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 55.

  A sound emission control device 91 is connected to the output side of the MPU 452. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91. The sound emission control device 91 drives and controls the various light emitting units 353 and 354 and the speaker device 338 based on the command received from the main control device 361 and transmits the command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 91 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control display of an image on the display surface of the symbol display device 61.

  In addition to the above, on the output side of the MPU 452, a special electric drive unit 53b for opening / closing the open / close door 53a of the special electric prize winning device 53, and a general electric for opening / closing the general electric utility 55a of the second operating port 55 The drive unit 55b, the special figure display part 62a, and the universal figure display part 63a are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 451, and the MPU 452 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 452 performs drive control of the special electricity driving unit 53b so that the special prize opening of the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened and closed. In addition, when the support for the electric utility item 55a is won, the MPU 452 performs drive control of the driving unit 55b for electric power so that the electric utility item 55a is opened and closed. Further, in each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 62a is executed in the MPU 452. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the electric utility object 55a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general-purpose display unit 63a is executed in the MPU 452.

  A payout control device 364 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the MPU 452. The payout control device 364 includes a payout control board 461 that controls the use and application of the launch ball, and a second power failure monitoring board 465 that monitors the supply status of power from the second power supply device 367.

  An MPU 462 is mounted on the payout control board 461. The MPU 462 incorporates a ROM 463 and a RAM 464. The ROM 463 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 463 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 462 and fixed value data. The RAM 464 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. The time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 463 when compared with the data capacity. The RAM 464 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 463. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 462 or the payout control board 461 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  In the following description, the MPU 452, the ROM 453, and the RAM 454 of the main control board 451 and the MPU 462, the ROM 463, and the RAM 464 of the payout control board 461 are clearly distinguished from each other. The RAM 454 is called the payout side MPU 462, the payout side ROM 463, and the payout side RAM 464.

  The payout side MPU 462 is provided with an input port and an output port. A second power failure monitoring board 465 provided in the payout control device 364 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 462.

  The second power failure monitoring board 465 relays the payout control board 461 and the second power supply device 367, and further monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the second power supply device 367. When the monitored voltage becomes less than 5 volts, a power failure signal is transmitted to the payout MPU 462 on the assumption that a power failure has occurred in the second power supply device 367.

  The second power supply device 367 is connected to a commercial power supply of the game hall, and supplies operating power to electric devices mounted on the pachinko machine 310 other than the game board 51. Specifically, the second power supply device 367 includes a payout control device 364, a firing control device 365, a firing solenoid 214, a ball supply device 213, a firing operation device 336, a firing ball detection sensor 384, a reader device 385, and various light emitting units 353. , 354, the speaker device 338 and the operation unit 441 are supplied with operating power. The second power supply device 367 also supplies operating power to the management unit 431 provided on the side of the pachinko machine 310.

  The second power supply 367 can store and hold data in the payout-side RAM 464 and the RAM 474 of the management unit 431 even when the supply of operating power from the commercial power supply to the second power supply 367 is stopped. For this purpose, a power supply unit for power interruption (not shown) for supplying backup power to the RAMs 464 and 474 is provided. The power supply unit for power interruption is a rechargeable type such as a capacitor, and charging is performed when operating power is supplied from the commercial power supply to the second power supply device 367. Data is stored and held in the RAMs 464 and 474 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days) by the backup power from the power supply unit at the time of power interruption even during a power failure.

  As described above, when the first power supply device 366 supplies the operating power, in addition to the electric device mounted on the game board 51, the electric device provided on the front door 322 includes the second The various light emitting units 353 and 354 and the operation unit 441 are excluded from the targets to which the power supply device 367 supplies operating power.

  In addition to the above, a firing ball detection sensor 384 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 462. The payout side MPU 462 grasps the presence or absence of a fired ball based on the detection result of the fired ball detection sensor 384.

  In addition to the main control device 361, a launch control device 365, a reader device 385, an operation unit 441 and a management unit 431 are connected to both the input side and the output side of the payout side MPU 462.

  The firing control device 365 is connected to the firing solenoid 214, the ball supply device 213, and the firing operation device 336. In the situation where the touch sensor 336c detects that the operation handle 336b of the launch operation device 336 is touched and the stop switch 336e is not turned on, the launch control device 365 is directed toward the payout MPU 462. Continues transmission of level condition satisfaction signal.

  In the situation where the transmission of the signal is continued, when the game can be launched, the sending-out signal of the HI level is continuously transmitted from the payout side MPU 462. In this case, the launch control device 365 performs drive control in the order of the ball supply device 213 → the launch solenoid 214, and supplies one launch ball onto the launch rail 212 and the supplied launch ball to the game area. Fire towards. The firing strength at this time is determined according to the signal transmitted from the variable resistor 336d of the launching operation device 336, but the minimum firing strength is determined by the launching side of the launching rail 212 on the launch rail side. The strength is set so as to reach a position closer to the game area PA than the end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the launch ball from flowing back on the launch rail 212 even though the launch ball is fired. In addition, when the transmission of the HI level launch permission signal is continued, the launch cycle of the launch ball is set to be a predetermined cycle. Specifically, one launch ball is launched in 0.6 sec. Is set to be.

  In addition, the launch control device 365 receives the HI level ID registration signal from the payout control device 364 even in a situation where the transmission of the condition establishment signal is not continued. The drive control is executed in the order of the solenoid 214, and one shot ball is supplied onto the shot rail 212 and the supplied shot ball is launched toward the game area PA. The launch intensity at this time is fixedly determined by the intensity with which the launch ball is supplied to the game area PA.

  The reader device 385 is for receiving ID information from a launch ball that has been supplied on the launch rail 212 and has not yet been launched, and outputs a call wave based on receiving a call wave output command from the payout MPU 462. The ID information read by receiving the response wave is transmitted to the payout MPU 462. Details of this will be described later.

  As already described, the operation unit 441 includes a frequency display unit 447, a remaining number display unit 448, and various operation buttons 442 to 446. A signal indicating whether or not various operation buttons 442 to 446 are operated is transmitted to the payout MPU 462. Further, display control of the frequency display unit 447 and the remaining number display unit 448 is executed based on a signal transmitted from the payout side MPU 462.

  The management unit 431 includes a management control board 471 that performs control for recognizing input cash, control for recognizing the input storage medium M, and control for discharging the storage medium M.

  An MPU 472 is mounted on the management control board 471. The MPU 472 incorporates a ROM 473 and a RAM 474. The ROM 473 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 473 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data. The RAM 474 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. The time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 473 when compared with the data capacity. The RAM 474 temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 473 is executed. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 472 or the management control board 471 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the MPU 472, ROM 473, and RAM 474 of the management control board 471 from those of the main control unit 361 and the payout control unit 364, the management side MPU 472, the management side ROM 473, and the management side RAM 474 say.

  The management side MPU 472 is provided with an input port and an output port. A banknote circuit 475 is connected to the input side of the management side MPU 472. The cash inserted into the cash slot 432 is identified by the banknote circuit 475, and the identification result is transmitted to the management MPU 472.

  Various driving units 476 a to 476 c are provided on the output side of the management side MPU 472. When cash is inserted into the cash slot 432, the drive unit 476 a corresponding to the cash slot 432 is driven and controlled, and the cash is taken into the management unit 431. When the storage medium M is inserted into the medium insertion slot 433, the drive unit 476b corresponding to the medium insertion slot 433 is driven and controlled, and the storage medium M is taken into the management unit 431. When the storage medium M is discharged, the drive unit 476c corresponding to the medium discharge port 434 is driven and controlled, and the storage medium M is discharged from the management unit 431.

  In addition to the payout control device 364, a medium circuit 477 is connected to both the input side and output side of the management side MPU 472. The storage medium M inserted into the medium insertion slot 433 is read by the medium circuit 477 and the stored information is transmitted to the management side MPU 472. When an instruction to eject the storage medium M is given, the medium circuit 477 performs a process of writing information to the storage medium M based on a signal transmitted from the management side MPU 472.

<Processing after power recovery and power failure executed by each MPU 452, 462, 472>
Next, a description will be given of processing after power recovery and power failure executed by the MPUs 452, 462, and 472. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 452 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S702, access to the main RAM 454 is permitted.

  Thereafter, in step S703, it is determined whether or not the first erase button 361b provided on the main controller 361 is manually operated. In subsequent step S704, “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 454. It is determined whether or not. In step S705, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S706, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, whether or not the stored data is valid. Determine whether.

  In the pachinko machine 310, for example, when the data in the main RAM 454 is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the first erase button 361b. Therefore, if the first erase button 361b is pressed, the process proceeds to step S707. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S707. In step S707, the main RAM 454 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 454. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S708.

  In step S708, it is determined whether or not the second erase button 361c provided in the main control device 361 is manually operated. When the pachinko machine 310 initializes not only the main RAM 454 but also the payout RAM 464 and the management RAM 474 when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing both the first erase button 361b and the second erase button 361c. It is thrown. Therefore, if not only the first erase button 361b but the second erase button 361c is pressed, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S 709, an initialization command for instructing initialization of the payout side RAM 464 and the management side RAM 474 is output to the payout side MPU 462. On the other hand, if the second erase button 361c is not pressed, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S <b> 710, the return command indicating that the main MPU 452 has completed the processing related to the initialization of the main RAM 454 and the other RAMs 464 and 474 is output to the payout MPU 462. In this case, even if the main RAM 454 is initialized, the payout RAM 464 and the management RAM 474 are not initialized.

That is, in the pachinko machine 310, when the power is turned on,
(1) The main RAM 454, the payout RAM 464, and the management RAM 474 are not initialized (2) The main RAM 454 is initialized, and the payout RAM 464 and the management RAM 474 are not initialized ( 3) The manager of the game hall can select any one of executing initialization for all of the main side RAM 454, the payout side RAM 464, and the management side RAM 474. Further, in this selection, an operation corresponding to the selection may be performed.

  In the pachinko machine 310, as will be described later, in the main controller 361, the progress of the game using the special figure display unit 62a, the general figure display unit 63a, the special electric prize device 53, and the general electric utility 55a is controlled, and the payout control is performed. The number of launch balls available in the device 364 and the management unit 431 is controlled. In this case, it is assumed that an internal abnormality occurs with respect to the progress of the former game in a situation where no abnormality has occurred regarding the control of the number of usable launch balls. On the other hand, it is assumed that some kind of fraud is performed and an abnormality occurs both in the progress of the game and in the control of the number of usable launch balls. On the other hand, by making it possible to selectively initialize the RAMs 454, 464, and 474 as described above, it is possible to appropriately cope with each event.

  The payout side RAM 464 and the management side RAM 474 may be initialized, and the main side RAM 454 may be operated without being initialized. For example, when the second erase button 361c is operated in a situation where the first erase button 361b is not operated, such initialization may be performed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S706, after executing the process of step S709 or after executing the process of step S710, the power-on setting process is executed in step S711. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 454 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is given to the sound emission control device 91 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to. In addition, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processes in steps S712 to S716. That is, the main MPU 452 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described later, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S712 to S716 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S712 to S716 are non-periodic processes executed irregularly.

  In the remaining processing, first, in step S712, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 454. The power failure flag is set to “1” when it is confirmed that a power failure signal has been received from the first power failure monitoring board 455 in the power failure information storage process (step S1001) in the timer interruption process of the main MPU 452, which will be described later. Flag to be

  If “1” is not set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S714, random number initial value update processing for updating a random number initial value counter CINI described later is executed, and in step S715, variation counter updating processing for updating a variation type counter CS described later is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 454, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S716, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. After executing the process of step S716, the process returns to step S712, and the processes of steps S712 to S716 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S712 that “1” is set in the power failure flag, the power failure occurrence processing in steps S717 to S720 is executed. In the process upon occurrence of a power failure, first, in step S717, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S718, a power failure command is output to the payout MPU 462 in order to recognize that a power failure has occurred in the main MPU 452. Thereafter, the checksum is calculated and stored in step S719, and after prohibiting access to the main RAM 454 in step S720, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  Next, the main process executed by the payout MPU 462 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether a return command has been received from the main MPU 452. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either an initialization command or a return command is received from the main MPU 452. If a return command has not been received, the process stands by in step S801. If a return command has been received, the process proceeds to step S802 and subsequent steps.

  The initialization command and the return command set as the return commands are transmitted when the main MPU 452 completes the processing related to the initialization of the main RAM 454 and the other RAMs 464 and 474. In addition, the main MPU 452 transmits an initialization command or a return command, and then proceeds to a process after completion of power recovery. In this case, as described above, the payout side MPU 462 waits until the return command is received, so that the main side MPU 452 does not complete the processing related to the initialization of the RAMs 454, 464, and 474, but pays out. The side MPU 462 is prevented from shifting to the processing after the completion of power recovery.

  In step S802, access to the payout side RAM 464 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S803, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received from the main MPU 452. If an initialization command has been received, the payout side RAM 464 is cleared in step S804. Thereafter, in step S805, an initialization command for instructing initialization of the management side RAM 474 is output to the management side MPU 472. On the other hand, if the initialization command has not been received, in step S806, a return command indicating that the processing on initialization of the payout side RAM 464 is completed in the payout side MPU 462 is output to the management side MPU 472.

  After executing the process of step S805 or after executing the process of step S806, initial setting of the operation unit 441 and the like is performed in step S807. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S808 to S810. That is, the payout side MPU 462 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as will be described later, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S808 to S810 are repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S808 to S810 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining processing, it is determined whether or not a power failure command is received from the main MPU 452 in step S808, and it is determined whether or not a power failure signal is received from the second power failure monitoring board 465 in step S809. . If a negative determination is made in both step S808 and step S809, in step S810, an interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After performing the process of step S810, it returns to step S808 and repeats the process of step S808-step S810.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S808 that a power failure command has been received from the main MPU 452, the power failure occurrence processing in steps S813 to S815 is executed. Even if a negative determination is made in step S808, it is determined in step S809 that a power failure signal has been received from the second power failure monitoring board 465, and then a power failure command is received from the main MPU 452 in step S811. If it is determined that the monitoring time at the time of power failure (for example, 100 msec) has elapsed since the affirmative determination is made in step S809 and the affirmative determination is made in step S812, step S813-step The process at the time of power failure occurrence of S815 is executed.

  In the process upon occurrence of a power failure, first, in step S813, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In subsequent step S814, a power failure command is output to the management side MPU 472 in order to recognize that a power failure has occurred in the payout side MPU 462. Thereafter, after prohibiting access to the payout side RAM 464 in step S815, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  In a configuration in which a power failure signal is output from the first power failure monitoring board 455 to the main side MPU 452 and a power failure signal is output from the second power failure monitoring board 465 to the payout side MPU 462, when the power switch is turned off, When a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, a power failure signal is output to the main MPU 452 and a power failure signal is output to the payout MPU 462 individually. In this case, even if the main MPU 452 receives a power failure signal in the middle of the timer interrupt process, the main MPU 452 does not immediately execute the power outage process, but executes the power outage process after completion of the timer interrupt process of the processing time. . In this configuration, even if the payout side MPU 462 receives a power failure signal, the payout side MPU 462 waits for reception of a power failure command from the main side MPU 452 or the elapse of the monitoring time at the time of power failure, and executes the power failure process. The monitoring time at the time of the power failure is that the payout MPU 462 receives the power failure command after the payout MPU 462 receives a power failure signal when the power switch is turned OFF or when a commercial power failure occurs. It is set as a time longer than the expected maximum time until. As a result, in a situation where a command other than the power failure command can be output from the main MPU 452 to the payout MPU 462 when a condition for executing the power failure process is satisfied in both the main MPU 452 and the payout MPU 462, the payout MPU 462 can Thus, it is possible to prevent the processing during power failure from being executed.

  In the configuration in which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 452 from the first power supply 366 and operating power is supplied to the payout MPU 462 from the second power supply 367, only one of the power supplies is supplied from the commercial power supply. It is assumed that the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this case, when the payout side MPU 462 receives a power failure command from the main side MPU 452, the payout side MPU 462 executes the power failure process regardless of whether or not a power failure signal is received from the second power failure monitoring board 465. When the control is stopped in the side MPU 452, the control can also be stopped in the payout side MPU 462.

  Even if the power failure command is not received from the main MPU 452, when the power failure signal is received from the second power failure monitoring board 465 and the power failure monitoring time has elapsed, the payout MPU 462 performs the power failure processing. Run. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the commercial power supply is stopped only for the second power supply device 367, control is stopped in the payout side MPU 462 while preventing the data in the payout side RAM 464 from being destroyed. It becomes possible to do.

  Next, the main process executed by the management side MPU 472 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether a return command has been received from the payout MPU 462. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either an initialization command or a return command is received from the payout side MPU 462. If a return command has not been received, the process stands by in step S901. If a return command has been received, the process proceeds to step S902 and subsequent steps.

  The initialization command and the return command set as the return commands are transmitted when the payout side MPU 462 has completed the processing related to the initialization of the payout side RAM 464. Also, the payout MPU 462 transmits an initialization command or a return command, and then proceeds to a process after the completion of power recovery. In this case, by waiting until the management-side MPU 472 receives a return command as described above, the management-side MPU 472 does not complete the processing on the payout-side MPU 462 regarding the initialization of the payout-side RAM 464. Is prevented from shifting to the process after the completion of power recovery.

  In step S902, access to the management side RAM 474 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S903, it is determined whether or not an initialization command has been received from the payout MPU 462. If the initialization command has been received, the management side RAM 474 is cleared in step S904. When a negative determination is made in step S903, or after execution of the processing in step S904, initial setting of the medium circuit 477, the banknote circuit 475, and the various drive units 476a to 476c is performed in step S905.

  Thereafter, normal processing in steps S906 to S908 is performed. In the normal process, first, in step S906, it is determined whether or not a power failure command is received from the payout MPU 462. If a power failure command has not been received, the ball supply management process is executed in step S907, the medium supply management process is executed in step S908, and the process returns to step S906. Each of these management processes will be described in detail later.

  If a power failure command is received in step S906, the power failure occurrence processing in step S909 is executed. Specifically, in step S909, access to the management side RAM 474 is prohibited. After that, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  As described above, the main processing is executed in the main MPU 452, the payout MPU 462, and the management MPU 472, so that at the time of power recovery, the main MPU 452 first proceeds to the processing after power recovery is completed, and then the payout MPU 462. Advances to processing after power recovery is completed, and finally, the management side MPU 472 proceeds to processing after power recovery is completed. When a power switch OFF operation or a commercial power failure occurs, the main MPU 452 first executes a power failure occurrence process, and then the payout MPU 462 executes a power failure occurrence process. In the side MPU 472, a power failure occurrence process is executed.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by main MPU 452>
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 452 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU 452. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific cycle on the main side, specifically, at a cycle of 4 msec.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S1001. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the first power failure monitoring board 455, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure flag in the main RAM 454 indicates “ 1 ”is set.

  In the subsequent step S1002, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and an electric accessory release counter C4, which will be described later, are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information Then, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S1003, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S714, and in step S1004, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S715. In subsequent step S1005, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Thereafter, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S1007 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S1007, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 53b and 55b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 53b is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when the information for switching the general electric utility 55a of the second working port 55 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 55b is started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S1008, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S1009, a signal received from each of the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a is read, and a winning detection process for performing a process corresponding to the read information is executed. The details of the winning detection process will be described later in detail. In step S1010, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 454 is executed.

  In subsequent step S1011, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed, and in step S1012, a prize ball command output setting processing is executed. . In step S1013, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S1008, the disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 341a to 345a, the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 312 and the front door 322 are confirmed. Confirm opening.

  In the subsequent step S1014, special figure special electric control processing is executed for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode. The special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S1015, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary power control process, when winning through the through gate 56 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the electric accessory release counter C4 described later is executed and the numerical information is stored. If it is, the numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed in response to the opening determination. In addition, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the common utility 55a of the second working port 55 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1016, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 62a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S1014 and S1015, and the display content of the general map display unit 63a is updated. Set the output information for

  In the subsequent step S1017, a demonstration display process is executed for setting the display content of the symbol display device 61 for standby display in a situation where both the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed.

  In subsequent step S1018, a ball management state reception process is performed for grasping information on the number of usable launch balls based on a command received from payout-side MPU 462, and in step S1019, the corresponding ball management state reception process is performed. The remaining sphere handling process, which is a process, is executed. Details of these processes will be described later.

  In subsequent step S1020, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of output of an external signal in accordance with the processing results of various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, or after the processing of steps S1007 to S1020 is executed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Next, the winning detection process executed in step S1009 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28) will be described.

  In the winning detection process, a process for confirming the detection results in the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a is executed. In this confirmation, the input port of the main MPU 452 is confirmed. Prior to the description of the winning detection process, the configuration of the input port 452a provided in the main MPU 452 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The input port 452a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

  In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 452a, in order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 452a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control. In the winning detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 452a is set in each of the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a.

  In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 342a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the winning signal from the first working opening detection sensor 343a. Information is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second working port detection sensor 344a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the first winning port detection sensor 341a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second winning mouth detection sensor 341b, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the third winning mouth detection sensor 341c. The sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the fourth winning opening detection sensor 341d, and the seventh bit D7 receives the winning from the gate detection sensor 345a. Information corresponding to the No. are stored.

  In this case, each of the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a outputs a HI level signal indicating that the game ball is not detected when it has not detected the passing of the game ball, and detects the passing of the game ball. If it is, a LOW level signal indicating that it is being detected is output as a winning signal. However, the main control board 451 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the signal state is inverted before the detection signals are input to the input port 452a. When the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the input port 452a stores “0” information (data 0 or no information) in the corresponding bit, and receives the HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If it is, information “1” (data 1 or presence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

  That is, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a, information of “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In such a situation, “1” information corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored in the corresponding bit.

  Each of the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a outputs a LOW level signal as a winning signal while not detecting the passing of a game ball, and outputs an HI level signal as a winning signal while detecting the passing of a gaming ball. It is good also as a structure to output. In this case, the inverting circuit may be omitted.

  In the winning detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30A, first, in step S1101, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is stored in the register of the main MPU 452. A process of shifting to the first winning determination area WA1 is executed. The first winning determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 30 (b-1), and stores all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is possible data capacity. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first winning determination area WA1 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit D0. Is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first winning determination area WA1.

  In the subsequent step S1102, a wait process for winning detection is executed. In this wait process, the main MPU 452 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In this pachinko machine 310, 10 μsec is set as the wait time, but it does not interfere with the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and sufficiently exhibits the effects described below by setting the wait process. However, the specific wait time is arbitrary, but it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

  Incidentally, as already explained, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S1102 is not set, a forcible wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between steps S1101 and S1103. In this regard, in step S1102, not only the minimum time required for executing the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S1101 and the process of step S1103.

  In the subsequent step S1103, a process of shifting the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second winning determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 452 is executed. Incidentally, the update of information at the input port 452a is performed at an interval shorter than the time from the completion of step S1101 to the start of step S1103, and therefore the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S1103. The information to be transferred from can be different from that in step S1101.

  Similarly to the first winning determination area WA1, the second winning determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 30 (b-2), and is stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. The data capacity is sufficient to store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second winning determination area WA2 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, and the storage source bits are further determined. And the storage destination bit are the same as in the first winning determination area WA1.

  Thereafter, in step S1104, after the winning determination process is executed, the main winning detection process is terminated. The winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the winning determination process, first, in step S1201, 8 is set in a winning determination counter provided in the main RAM 454. In subsequent step S1202, each bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit in the input port 452a.

  In subsequent step S1203, AND processing of each information grasped in step S1202 is executed, and the AND processing result is stored in a register. In step S1204, the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are stored. Among them, the AND processing result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing is stored in the winning detection processing in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 30 (b-3) and 30 (b-4), and each of the first winning determination areas WA1. The data capacity is capable of storing all the information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second winning determination area WA2. In this case, the order of bits in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 subjected to AND processing and the order of each bit in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are unambiguous. Is stipulated.

  After that, in step S1205, the information on the result of the AND process in the winning determination process in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt process in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 is stored. Then, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is read. In step S1206, an inversion process for inverting the read information between “0” and “1” is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1207, AND processing is performed on the AND processing result information in step S1203 and the inversion processing result information in step S1206. In subsequent step S1208, the AND processing result is used as winning detection start information. It is determined whether or not the corresponding value is “1”. If it is determined in step S1208 that the AND processing result is “1”, the processing proceeds to step S1209 and subsequent steps.

  In step S1209, it is determined whether or not the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to one of the first operation port 54 and the second operation port 55. If it corresponds to either the first working port 54 or the second working port 55, in step S1210, “1” is set to the working winning flag provided in the main RAM 454, and in step S1211. 1 is added to the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 454.

  The operation winning flag is a process corresponding to winning in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55, and the main MPU 452 specifies that a process other than the execution of the prize ball should be executed. Flag. Incidentally, since the winning detection sensors 343a and 344a are provided in the first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55, respectively, the winning for the first operating port 54 and the winning for the second operating port 55 are timers. It may be grasped at the same time within the range of one processing of interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the operation winning flag is provided in correspondence with the number of the operation ports 54 and 55, and specifically, two operation winning flags are provided. The three prize ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 452 the number of times to output the three prize ball commands instructing the execution of the three prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the special electricity winning device 53. If it corresponds to the special electric prize winning device 53, “1” is set to the large winning flag provided in the main RAM 454 in step S1213, and 15 pieces provided in the main RAM 454 in step S1214. 1 is added to the numerical information of the prize ball counter.

  The big winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 452 that processing corresponding to winning in the special electric prize winning device 53 is in a state in which processing other than execution of the winning ball is to be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 452 to specify the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands instructing execution of 15 prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1212, it is determined in step S1215 whether or not the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 56. If it corresponds to the through gate 56, “1” is set to the through flag provided in the main RAM 454 in step S1216. If a negative determination is made in step S1215, it means that the current winning is corresponding to the general winning opening 52, so in step S1217, the value of the ten winning ball counters provided in the main RAM 454 is displayed. Add 1 to the information.

  The through flag is a flag for the main MPU 452 to specify that the process corresponding to winning through the through gate 56 is to be executed. The 10-award ball counter is a counter for specifying, on the main MPU 452, the number of times to output a 10-award ball command for instructing the execution of 10 award balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1208, or after any one of steps S1211, S1214, S1216, and S1217 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1218. In step S1218, the winning determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S1219, it is determined whether or not the winning determination counter is “0”.

  If it is not “0”, the processing of steps S1202 to S1217 is executed for the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the winning determination counter updated in step S1218. When the processes in steps S1202 to S1217 are executed for the numerical information set in step S1201, an affirmative determination is made in step S1219, and the main winning determination process ends.

  Next, the winning detection process (FIG. 30) is executed, so that a prize is awarded to the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55 and the through gate 56 in the game area PA. The manner in which the presence or absence is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, timing for monitoring detection results (hereinafter also referred to as winning information) in the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a time chart for explaining the timing for monitoring each winning information.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, in the configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28) is activated at a period of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process for monitoring the winning information is 2 in each process of the timer interrupt process. Times (step S1101, step S1103). The process of monitoring each set of winning information is executed so that the timing is changed, but the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side (step S1101) is time T2 with respect to the timing when the timer interrupt process is started. It is executed at the timing when.

  In this case, the timing at which the winning detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the process whose processing time is likely to fluctuate, such as the special figure special electric control process and the ordinary figure ordinary electric control process. The processing executed prior to the detection processing is processing in which the processing time is relatively difficult to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is started in the timer interrupt process for each processing time is the same, substantially the same or similar at T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is periodically executed.

  Among the processes for monitoring each set of winning information, between the process for monitoring the winning information on the front side (step S1101) and the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side (step S1103), The wait process (step S1102) is executed. In such a wait process, no process is executed and only a wait is made until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side is periodically executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32 (B), the contents of the calculation executed when winning determination is performed will be described. FIG. 32B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a calculation executed when winning determination is performed. Actually, various operations are performed in units of 1 bit, but in the following description, the contents of the operations will be described in units of 1 byte. However, a configuration in which an operation in units of 1 byte as described below is actually performed may be employed.

  In the case of FIG. 32B, first, in the process of monitoring the first-side winning information in the n-th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 32B1, “00100000” is displayed in the first winning determination area WA1. It is set. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a, the winning information of the third winning mouth detection sensor 41c is information indicating that a game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as winning information), and other sensors. The winning information is information indicating that no game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as no winning information).

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the n-th timer interrupt process, “10100000” is set in the second winning determination area WA2, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a, each of the gate detection sensor 345a and the third winning opening detection sensor 341c is winning information, and the other sensors are winning information.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “00100000” as shown in FIG. 32 (B3), and the information is This is set in the first post-computation area WA3 as a monitoring result of the winning information in the timer interruption processing of the n-th processing time. If the winning information monitoring result is set in the first post-computation area WA3 in the (n-1) th timer interrupt processing, the winning information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing is the second post-computation area. Set to WA4. Also, the winning determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the winning information at the (n-1) th time and the monitoring result of the winning information at the nth time, but the contents of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), “10100110” is set in the first winning determination area WA1 in the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a, each of the gate detecting sensor 345a, the third winning port detecting sensor 341c, the second operating port detecting sensor 344a, and the first operating port detecting sensor 343a is winning information. Other sensors have no winning information.

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, “101000110” is set in the second winning determination area WA2, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a, each of the gate detection sensor 345a, the third winning port detection sensor 341c, and the first working port detection sensor 343a is winning information, and the other sensors are not winning information. It has become.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “1010001” as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), and the information is This is set in the second post-computation area WA4 as a result of monitoring the winning information in the timer interrupt processing of the (n + 1) th processing time.

  Thereafter, in the winning determination process (FIG. 31) in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process, first, the monitoring result of the winning information in the nth timer interrupt process is read from the first post-calculation area WA3 and the read monitoring is performed. Inversion processing is performed on the resulting information. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (B7), “11011111” is obtained. Then, the result of the inversion process is ANDed with the monitoring result of the winning information in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. This results in “10000010” as shown in FIG. 32 (B8). In this case, in the winning determination process, it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 345a, and it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 343a.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), the second operating port detection sensor 344a becomes the winning information in the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. This is caused by static noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from information with no winning information to information with winning information, it is not immediately determined that winning has occurred, but when winning information is confirmed multiple times, it is determined that winning has occurred. It is. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5), in the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, the second operating port detection sensor 344a is no-winning information, and the electrical noise The occurrence is not treated as a winning game ball.

  Further, the third prize opening detection sensor 341c receives information on winning in each of the process of monitoring one set of winning information in the n-th timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of winning information in the n + 1-th timer interrupt process. However, this indicates a state in which a game ball in which the occurrence of a winning is already detected is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of the winning is specified on the condition that the monitoring result of the winning information in the n-th timer interrupt processing is “0”, the winning of one game ball is treated as a plurality of winnings. I will not.

  When the winning detection process is executed as described above, the detection results of the winning detection sensors 341a to 345a are monitored, and when a winning corresponding to the provision of the fired ball is generated, In accordance with the winning location, an addition process to the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter and 15 prize ball counter is executed. If any of these counters is equal to or greater than “1”, a prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S1012) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28). The awarded ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 462. In this case, the output setting of the prize ball command is performed only once in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is “2” or more, the 15 prize ball commands are transmitted only once in one process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined plurality (for example, two or three) of prize ball commands may be transmitted in one processing time.

  In addition, there may be a case where each of the three prize ball counters, the ten prize ball counters, and the 15 prize ball counters is “1” or more. In this case, an output of a prize ball command with a large number of prize balls is output. have priority. That is, the output of 15 prize ball commands has priority over the output of 10 prize ball commands and the output of 3 prize ball commands, and the output of 10 prize ball commands has priority over the output of 3 prize ball commands. .

  When the 15 prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the 15 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 15 prize ball counter. Further, when the 10 prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the 10 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 10 prize ball counter. When the three prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the three prize ball command is set as an output target, the three prize ball counter is decremented by one.

  Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S1014 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28) will be described.

  Prior to the description of the special figure special electric control process, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 452 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main-side MPU 452 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display unit 62a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 61, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 63a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 61 are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric utility release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric utility item 55a of the second operating port 55 is set to the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 454a of the main RAM 454.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding storage area 454b when a winning to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 occurs.

  The holding storage area 454b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, In addition, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55 are stored and stored. .

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 62a. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 454b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a success / failure table in the success / failure table storage area of the main ROM 453. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 310, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 454b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55.

  In the pachinko machine 310, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 53 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the winning lottery means after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode of the two operating ports 55 in the utility model 55a.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 53 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special prize winning device 53 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  Here, the round game is continued until either one of a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the big winning opening 42b is satisfied. It is a game to play. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Further, in the present pachinko machine 310, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electricity winning device 53 are set with different opening durations from when the special winning opening is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.8 sec, which is a short duration shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been.

  In the present pachinko machine 310, when the launch operation device 336 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 211 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is shorter than the product of the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, the opening duration that is about the same as or slightly longer than the launching period of the game balls. Is set. Therefore, when the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will be generated at the big prize opening. When the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once, it is expected that no prize will be given to the big prize opening or that even if a prize is generated, it will be about one.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the big winning opening is opened once in a round manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are higher in the high frequency winning mode. As long as the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electric prize winning device 53 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that in the low-frequency winning mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. is there.

  As a support mode of the second operating port 55 in the electric utility object 55a, when compared in a situation in which the game ball is continuously launched in the game area in the same manner, The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency at which 55a is opened per unit time is relatively high.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the main utility object 55a is in the open state when the electrified state is elected is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one more time The opening time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the utility model 55a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 55 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 54 than in the second operating port 55, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 54. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 55 increases. When a winning to the second operating port 55 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (e.g., based on the winning to the through gate 56, in the general map display portion 63a) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, Apply one of the conditions or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the main ROM 453 as a distribution table. As the distribution destinations, a low probability big hit result, an explicit high probability big hit result, and a most advantageous big hit result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The explicit high-accuracy big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery results in a jackpot result and shifts to the jackpot state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery results in a jackpot result and shifts to the jackpot state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the explicit high probability hit result is not set as a game result.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit high probability big hit result. “15-29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  As a kind of high-accuracy big hit result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An explicit explicit high probability hit result (a game result corresponding to an implicit high probability or a result of a latent probability changing state) may be included. In this case, the jackpot result can be further diversified.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration where both the above-mentioned explicit high probability jackpot result and the special outlier result are set as described above, the switching execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode is the previous mode. In other words, in the normal gaming state, for example, either an explicit explicit high-precision winning result or a special outage result has occurred. In this case, it is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to the result.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 454b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 310, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 61. The reach display includes a symbol display device 61 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in the game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the special electricity winning device 53 is the high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, the player is assumed to be in a variable display state that is likely to be the special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 61 is started. The display state for this purpose.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is obtained by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that may be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode. In game times that do not enter the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 453 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. It is executed when That is, the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to execute reach display. However, in determining the type of reach display, the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 is not used.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 452 determines the variation display time in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 61. The variation type counter CS is updated in each of the main processing and timer interrupt processing described later, and the variation type is determined when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 62a and at the beginning of symbol variation by the symbol display device 61. The value of the counter CS is acquired. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the main ROM 453 is referred to.

  Here, when it is determined to generate a reach display based on the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3, or because it is a game time to shift to an opening / closing execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode. When it is determined to generate a display, the type of reach display is determined using numerical information acquired from the variation type counter CS. Each reach display differs in the type of character appearing in the reach display, the period during which the reach display is executed, and the like.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in an electric accessory reservation area 454c provided in the main RAM 454 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 56. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the universal utility 55a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric utility release counter C4.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing special figure special electric control processing.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 is generated, a process for obtaining the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed in step S1301. In the holding information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated for the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, and when a winning occurs, the number of holds in the holding storage area 454b is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number of holds is less than the upper limit value, the number of holds is incremented by 1 and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S1002 is used for holding. Stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE.

  In addition, when the winning to the 1st operation port 54 and the 2nd operation port 55 has generate | occur | produced simultaneously, the process for acquiring the said hold information within the range which performs the acquisition process of a hold information once is performed. Run multiple times.

  After executing the hold information acquisition process in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, confirmation processing for holding advance notice is executed. Details of the confirmation process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S1303, a process for reading information on the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 454 is executed, and in a step S1304, a process for reading the special figure special electric address table from the main ROM 453 is executed. In step S1305, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to information on the special figure special power counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, processing contents of steps S1303 to S1305 will be described.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process related to the effect for game times, a special figure change start process (step S1307) that is a process for starting the effect for game times and a process for advancing the effect for game times. A special figure changing process (step S1308) and a special figure finalizing process (step S1309) which is a process for ending the effect for the game round are set.

  In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S1310) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a special electricity release which is a process for controlling the open state of the special winning opening. Middle process (step S1311), special electricity closing process (step S1312) that is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening, and the ending of the opening / closing execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode Special electric power termination processing (step S1313), which is processing for controlling

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 452 to know which of the above-mentioned types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process (step S1307), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure changing process (step S1308). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S1309), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S1310). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S1311), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S1312). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 is Electrically movable device control termination processing is the starting address of a program for executing (step S1313).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  After executing the process of step S1305, in step S1306, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1305 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S1307.

  In the special figure variation start process, on the condition that the hold information is stored on hold, a process for shifting the hold information to the execution area AE of the hold storage area 454b is executed, and the data of each hold area RE1 to RE4 is transferred. A process of shifting to the upper side (that is, the first reservation area RE1 side) is executed. After that, with respect to the hold information shifted to the execution area AE, whether or not to determine whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot winning, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the hold information corresponds to any jackpot result Execute a distribution determination process for determining whether or not In the determination process, whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information is numerical information corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. In the distribution determination process, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information corresponds to which jackpot result category.

  In addition to the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, when the hold information does not correspond to the big win, the reach determination process is performed to determine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Then, the duration selection process for selecting the duration of the game times is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In the reach determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information corresponds to the numerical information on the occurrence of reach.

  When the duration information is selected, the variation command including the duration information and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the sound emission control device 91, and the pattern on the special display 62a is displayed. Start the variable display. As a result, one game round is started, and an effect for game round is started on the special figure display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61.

  By the way, when the effect for the game round is started in this way, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure variation start process. Update to the one corresponding to the changing process.

  If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process of step S1308. In the special figure changing process, a process for determining whether or not it is during the game time duration and before the fixed display is performed. If it is before the fixed display, the display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 62a is performed. A process for regularly changing the aspect is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until it is the timing to display the fixed figure, if it is not the timing to make a fixed display, the process for changing the regular figure is executed and then the special figure is changing. The process ends. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the timing for final display is reached. In addition, when it is time to confirm and display, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure in-flight process from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process Update to what you did.

  If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S1309. In the special figure determination process, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91 in order to cause the symbol display device 61 to display the stop result of the current game round as a final stop display. The display mode is a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. In the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the period during confirmation display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the mode transition process is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure determination process until the fixed display period elapses, this special figure determination process is terminated if the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the fixed display is started, the special figure determination process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the period during the fixed display elapses. In addition, when the period during the fixed display has elapsed, in a situation where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is initialized (ie, cleared to “0”), and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode In such a situation, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the one corresponding to the special electric power start process.

  If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special power start process in step S1310. In the special electricity start process, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start process to the one corresponding to the special power open process. .

  If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the special electricity releasing process in step S1311. In the special electric release opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. When the end condition is not satisfied, the process is not waited for in the special electricity release process, but the process for monitoring the establishment of the end condition is executed, and then the special electricity release process is terminated. When the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric power open process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closed process. Update.

  If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power closing process in step S1312. In the special electricity closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. When the interval period has not elapsed, this special electric power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special power closing process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period has elapsed, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric current closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric current opening process. To do.

  On the other hand, in the special power shut-off process for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power shut-off process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination processing.

  If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special power end process in step S1313. In the special electric power end process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power end processing is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power end processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing processing for setting the gaming state (open / close lottery mode and support mode) after the opening / closing execution mode, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is initialized. The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power end process to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Processing for Managing Launch Balls Executed by Dispensing MPU 462 and Management MPU 472>
Next, a process for managing the launch ball executed by the payout side MPU 462 and the management side MPU 472 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the payout side MPU 462. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific period on the payout side, specifically at a period of 4 msec.

  In the timer interruption process, first, in step S1401, a game ball management process for managing the rental of the shot ball and the use of the shot ball is executed, and in the subsequent step S1402, the shot management for managing the launch of the shot ball In step S1403, a return management process for managing the return of the game value (that is, the storage medium M) is executed, and in step S1404, ID registration for executing registration of ID information is executed. In step S1405, ID monitoring processing for monitoring ID information is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Hereinafter, each process of step S1401 to step S1405 will be described in detail.

<Game Ball Management Processing>
First, the game ball management process executed in step S1401 will be described. Prior to the description of the game ball management process, the ball supply management process executed by the management side MPU 472 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process for supplying the sphere is executed in step S907 of the main process (FIG. 27) in the management side MPU 472.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined based on a signal from the banknote circuit 475 whether or not a banknote has been inserted into the cash slot 432 of the management unit 431. If a bill has been inserted, bill discrimination processing is executed in step S1502. In the banknote circuit 475, the size of the inserted banknote can be identified. When a 10,000 yen bill is inserted, a corresponding banknote insertion signal is output, and a 5,000 yen bill is inserted. Outputs a bill insertion signal corresponding to it, outputs a bill insertion signal corresponding to the insertion of a 2000 yen bill, and outputs a corresponding bill insertion signal when a 1000 yen bill is inserted. Is output. In the determination process in step S1502, it is determined which type of bill insertion signal is received from the bill circuit 475.

  In subsequent step S1503, the frequency information corresponding to the determination result in step S1502 is grasped by referring to the frequency reference table stored in advance in the management ROM 473. Specifically, if it is a 10,000 yen bill, the frequency information is “100”, and if it is a 5000 yen bill, the frequency information is “50”, and it is 2,000 yen. When it is a bill, it is grasped that the frequency information is “20”, and when it is a 1,000 yen bill, it is grasped that the frequency information is “10”.

  Thereafter, in step S1504, frequency information output setting corresponding to the result obtained in step S1503 is executed. Specifically, the ball supply command including the frequency information grasped in step S1503 is output to the payout MPU 462.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1501 or after the processing in step S1504 is executed, the storage medium M is inserted into the medium insertion port 433 of the management unit 431 based on the signal from the medium circuit 477 in step S1505. It is determined whether or not. The storage medium M is configured so that the frequency information and the remaining sphere information can be stored individually and can be stored simultaneously. The remaining ball information is information indicating the number of shot balls that can be used by the player. The medium circuit 477 is configured such that the frequency information and the remaining sphere information stored in the storage medium M can be individually read out and can be recognized.

  If the storage medium M is loaded, it is determined in step S1506 whether or not the frequency information is written in the storage medium M based on the signal from the medium circuit 477. If the frequency information is written, the frequency information is read in step S1507, and the output setting of the read frequency information is executed in step S1508. Specifically, the ball supply command including the frequency information read in step S1507 is output to the payout MPU 462.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1506 or after the processing in step S1508 is executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the remaining sphere information is written in the storage medium M based on the signal from the medium circuit 477. judge. If the remaining sphere information is written, the remaining sphere information is read in step S1510, and the output setting of the read remaining sphere information is executed in step S1511. Specifically, the ball supply command including the remaining ball information read in step S1510 is output to the payout side MPU 462. When a negative determination is made in step S1509 or after the process of step S1511 is executed, the management process for supplying the main ball is ended.

  Even when both the frequency information and the remaining sphere information are stored in the input storage medium M, the sphere supply command corresponding to the frequency information and the sphere supply command corresponding to the remaining sphere information are individually provided. Sent to.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a game ball management process executed by the payout side MPU 462. In the following description, display contents of the frequency display unit 447 and the remaining number display unit 448 of the operation unit 441 will be described with reference to FIG. 38A to 38C are front views of the operation unit 441. FIG.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether a ball supply command is received from the management side MPU 472 or not. The ball supply commands transmitted from the management side MPU 472 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer of the payout side RAM 464, and the ball supply commands stored in the ring buffer are sequentially read each time the game ball management process is activated. Therefore, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed ball supply command is stored in the ring buffer.

  If a ball supply command has been received, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not frequency information is included in the ball supply command. If the frequency information is included, in step S1603, the frequency information included in the ball supply command received this time is added to the frequency information storage area 464a provided in the payout side RAM 464. 464a is updated. In subsequent step S1604, the display of the frequency display unit 447 is updated so that the frequency information in the frequency information storage area 464a after the update in step S1603 is displayed on the frequency display unit 447 of the operation unit 441. For example, as shown in FIG. 38A, “50” is displayed on the frequency display portion 447 in a situation where “0” is displayed on the remaining number display portion 448.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, it means that the current ball supply command includes the remaining ball information instead of the frequency information. In this case, in step S1605, the storage area 464b is updated so that the remaining sphere information storage area 464b provided in the payout side RAM 464 is added with the remaining sphere information included in the currently supplied sphere supply command. In the subsequent step S1606, the display of the remaining number display unit 448 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b after the update in step S1605 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448 of the operation unit 441. For example, as shown in FIG. 38B, “5375” is displayed on the remaining number display portion 448 in a situation where “0” is displayed on the frequency display portion 447. For example, when the storage medium M in which both the frequency information and the remaining sphere information are written is inserted into the medium insertion port 433 of the management unit 431, as shown in FIG. “25” is displayed at the same time, and “7243” is displayed at the remaining number display portion 448.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process in step S1604 is executed, or if the process in step S1606 is executed, the process proceeds to the ball supply process in steps S1607 to S1611.

  In the ball supply process, first, in step S1607, it is determined whether or not the ball supply button 442 of the operation unit 441 is operated. If the ball supply button 442 is operated, a memory update process for subtraction of frequency information is executed in step S1608. Specifically, the storage area 464a is updated so that a predetermined number of pieces of frequency information (specifically “5”) is subtracted from the frequency information stored in the frequency information storage area 464a. In subsequent step S1609, the display of the frequency display unit 447 is updated so that the frequency information in the frequency information storage area 464a after the update in step S1608 is displayed on the frequency display unit 447.

  In the subsequent step S1610, storage update processing for adding the remaining sphere information is executed. Specifically, the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b is added with the corresponding number of remaining sphere information (specifically “125”) corresponding to the predetermined number of frequency information. Thus, the storage area 464b is updated. In subsequent step S1611, the display of the remaining number display unit 448 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b after the update in step S1610 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1607 or if the process in step S1611 is executed, the process proceeds to a prize ball handling process in steps S1612 to S1615.

  In the prize ball handling process, first, in step S1612, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is received from the main MPU 452. The winning ball commands transmitted from the main MPU 452 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer of the payout RAM 464, and the winning ball commands stored in the ring buffer are sequentially read each time the game ball management process is activated. Therefore, in step S1612, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed prize ball command is stored in the ring buffer.

  If a prize ball command has been received, the number of prize balls is ascertained in step S1613. In the grasping process, information on the number of prize balls included in the prize ball command received this time is grasped. In this pachinko machine 310, the prize ball command transmitted from the main MPU 452 is any one of the three prize ball commands, the ten prize ball commands, and the fifteen prize ball commands, and therefore the prize recognized in step S1613. The number of balls is either 3, 10, or 15.

  In the subsequent step S1614, a storage update process for adding the remaining sphere information is executed. Specifically, the storage area 464b is updated so that the remaining ball information corresponding to the number of prize balls is added to the remaining ball information stored in the remaining ball information storage area 464b. In the subsequent step S1615, the display of the remaining number display unit 448 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b after the update in step S1614 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1612 or if the process of step S1615 is executed, the process advances to step S1616 to execute a management process for game ball use, and in step S1617, output of frequency information and remaining ball information After executing the process, the present game ball management process is terminated. The management process of game ball use in step S1616 will be described later. In step S1617, the frequency information stored in the frequency information storage area 464a of the payout side RAM 464 and the remaining ball information stored in the remaining ball information storage area 464b of the payout side RAM 464 are stored in the main MPU 452 as a ball management command. Output.

<Launch management processing>
Next, the launch management process executed in step S1402 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 35) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the ID registration execution flag is set to “1” by setting whether or not “1” is set in the ID registration execution flag provided in the payout side RAM 464. The ID registration execution state is a state in which ID information is read from each of a large number of fired balls circulating in the pachinko machine 310 and registered. Details of the ID registration execution state will be described later. If it is in the ID registration execution state, the present launch management process is terminated as it is, and if it is not in the ID registration execution state, the process proceeds to step S1702.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether or not front door 322 is being opened. As described above, the opening detection switch 339 that detects whether or not the front door 322 is open is electrically connected to the main MPU 452, and the main MPU 452 indicates the detection result of the opening detection switch 339 as the payout MPU 462. Send to. The payout side MPU 462 determines whether or not the front door 322 is open based on the transmitted detection result.

  In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level. As already described, the condition satisfaction signal is a signal output from the firing control device 365 toward the payout MPU 462, and the touch sensor 336c detects that the operation handle 336b of the firing operation device 336 is touched. In the situation where the stop switch 336e is not ON, the transmission of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is continued. In step S1704, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b of the payout side RAM 464 is 1 or more.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1702 and an affirmative determination is made in steps S1703 and S1704, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the HI level in step S1705. The launch permission signal is a signal output from the payout side MPU 462 toward the launch control device 365, and the payout side MPU 462 continues to transmit the launch permission signal at the HI level when the above condition is satisfied. When the launch control device 365 receives an HI level launch permission signal from the payout side MPU 462, the launch control device 365 uses the ball supply device 213 and the launch solenoid 214 to launch the launch ball. After executing the process of step S1705, the present launch management process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, a negative determination is made in step S1703, or a negative determination is made in step S1704, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level in step S1706. To do. Thereby, the firing of the firing ball is stopped. After executing the process of step S1706, the present launch management process is terminated.

  Here, when the front door 322 is being opened as described above, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level, so that when the front door 322 is being opened, the firing ball is fired. Is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fired ball from being fired even though the front door 322 is open. For example, when the front door 322 is opened for maintenance of a game area or the like, the fired ball becomes a pachinko machine. Outflow from 310 is prevented.

  Next, the firing control process executed by the firing control device 365 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the launch control process is periodically started at a cycle of 2 msec.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the launch permission signal output from the payout side MPU 462 is at the HI level. If the launch permission signal is at the HI level, the value of the first launch period counter provided in the launch control device 365 is incremented by 1 in step S1802, and if the launch permission signal is at the LOW level, step S1802 is performed. In S1803, the value of the first firing period counter is cleared to “0”. The first firing cycle counter has a predetermined firing cycle of the launch ball in a situation where the launch ball should be launched using the ball supply device 213 and the launch solenoid 214 based on the operation of the launch operation device 336. It is a counter used for

  When the process of step S1802 is executed or when the process of step S1803 is executed, it is determined in step S1804 whether the first ball has been fed. In the state in which the first ball has been sent, in the situation where the shot ball should be launched based on the operation of the launch operation device 336, the supply of one shot ball onto the launch rail 212 by the ball supply device 213 has already been completed. It is a state.

  If the first ball has not been fed, it is determined in step S1805 whether the value of the first firing period counter is “300”. As described above, the first firing period counter is incremented by 1 each time the launch control process is started in a state where the launch permission signal is at the HI level. Further, the launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, when the value of the first firing period counter is “300”, it means that the output state of the HI level continues after the firing permission signal becomes the HI level, or one firing This means that 0.6 sec has passed in a state where the output state of the HI level launch permission signal has continued since the ball was launched.

  When the value of the first firing period counter is “300”, the process proceeds to step S1806 to step S1808. In step S1806, the value of the first firing period counter is cleared to “0”. In step S1807, a driving signal for ball feeding is output to the ball supply device 213. In step S1808, the first ball feeding completed state is set. Set. The ball supply device 213 supplies one shot ball from the circulation storage tank 231 onto the shot rail 212 by outputting the ball feed driving signal.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, 1 is added to the value of the first post-ball feed counter provided in the firing control device 365 in step S1809. Based on the operation of the launch operation device 336, the post-first ball feed counter launches the launch ball by driving and controlling the launch solenoid 214 after one launch ball is supplied onto the launch rail 212 by the ball supply device 213. This is a counter for specifying the timing to perform in the firing control device 365.

  In a succeeding step S1810, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter after the first ball feeding is “100”. As described above, the counter after the first ball feeding is incremented by one every time the launch control process is started in the first ball fed state. The launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, the case where the value of the counter after the first ball feeding is “100” means that 0.2 sec has elapsed after one shot ball is supplied on the shot rail 212.

  When the value of the counter after the first ball feeding is “100”, the process proceeds to step S1811 to step S1813. In step S1811, the firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 336b is grasped based on the signal transmitted from the variable resistor 336d of the firing operation device 336. In step S1812, a driving signal for launching corresponding to the firing intensity grasped in step S1811 is output to firing solenoid 214. As a result, the fire ball supplied on the fire rail 212 is fired at a fire strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 336b. Thereafter, in step S1813, the first ball fed state is canceled.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1805, if the process of step S1808 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1810, or if the process of step S1813 is executed, in step S1814, the ID registration After executing the firing control process, the firing control process is terminated. The launch control process for ID registration will be described in detail later.

  Next, game ball use management processing executed in the payout side MPU 462 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the management process for using the game ball is executed in step S1616 of the game ball management process (FIG. 37).

  In step S1901, an HI level shot ball detection signal corresponding to the detection of the shot ball is received from the shot ball detection sensor 384 for detecting one shot ball held on the shot rail 212. It is determined whether or not. If the firing ball detection sensor 384 is not ON, the value of the launch detection counter provided in the payout side RAM 464 is cleared to “0” in step S1902, and then this management process is terminated. The firing detection counter is a counter for measuring in the payout side MPU 462 the period during which the firing ball detection sensor 384 is continuously ON.

  If the firing ball detection sensor 384 is ON, 1 is added to the value of the firing detection counter in step S1903. In a succeeding step S1904, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing detection counter is “2”. If the value of the firing detection counter is not “2”, the present management process is terminated as it is. If the value of the firing detection counter is “2”, it is determined in step S1905 whether the ID registration execution state is set. If it is not in the ID registration execution state, the ball use processing in steps S1906 to S1908 is executed.

  Specifically, in step S1906, a storage update process for subtracting the remaining sphere information is executed. Specifically, the storage area 464b is updated so that 1 is subtracted from the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b. In the subsequent step S1907, the display of the remaining number display unit 448 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b after the update in step S1906 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448. Thereafter, in step S1908, “1” is set in the normal medium detection flag provided in the payout side RAM 464, and then this management process is terminated. The normal detection flag is a flag used by the payout side MPU 462 to specify that one shot ball has been supplied onto the launch rail 212 based on the player's launch operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the ID registration execution state is set, in step S1909, “1” is set in the registration detection flag provided in the payout side RAM 464, and then this management process is terminated. . The in-registration detection flag is a flag for the payout-side MPU 462 to specify that one firing ball has been supplied onto the firing rail 212 in the ID registration execution state.

<Return management processing>
Next, the return management process executed in step S1403 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 35) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level. When the condition satisfaction signal is not at the HI level, that is, when the player is not operating the firing operation device 336, processing for providing the storage medium M after step S2002 is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 310, processing for providing the storage medium M is executed on condition that the firing operation device 336 is not operated. As a result, it is prohibited to perform the process for providing the storage medium M in a situation where the remaining ball information subtraction process associated with the launch operation is being performed, and the remaining ball information can be handled accurately. .

  In step S2002, it is determined whether or not all return buttons 443 of the operation unit 441 are operated. If all return buttons 443 have been operated, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. The payout side MPU 462 receives an opening command from the main side MPU 452 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and further receives an ending command from the main side MPU 452 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and therefore grasps whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, that is, when the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, the return management process is terminated as it is. This makes it possible to invalidate the operation of all return buttons 443 during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In a configuration in which refilling of the fired ball from the outside is impossible and the remaining ball information is 1 or more, firing of the fired ball is permitted, and at least the storage medium M is ejected when the all return button 443 is operated. It is impossible to fire the fired ball between the time until the time when the storage medium M or the bill is inserted and a new set of the remaining ball information is performed. If such an event occurs due to an erroneous operation of the all return button 443 during the opening / closing execution mode, the round game cannot be suitably digested. On the other hand, it is difficult to think about intentionally operating all return buttons 443 during the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, the inconvenience as described above can be prevented by invalidating the operation of the all return button 443 during the opening / closing execution mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004, and it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the prize ball standby flag provided in the payout side RAM 464. The payout side MPU 462 can receive a standby start command indicating the contents when any value of each prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 454 becomes 1 or more, and each prize ball counter When all the values are “0”, a standby end command indicating the contents can be received. The winning ball waiting flag is set to “1” when a waiting start command is received, and a process for adding to the remaining ball information for the winning ball command received simultaneously with the waiting end command is received. “0” is cleared when the process is completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if the award ball processing has not been completed, the return management processing is terminated as it is. This makes it possible to invalidate the operation of the all return button 443 in a situation where the processing of prize balls is not completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the remaining ball information from becoming “1” or more based on the winning ball immediately after the storage medium M is ejected based on the operation of the all return button 443.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the frequency information is read from the frequency information storage area 464a of the payout side RAM 464, and in step S2006, the remaining ball information is read from the remaining ball information storage area 464b of the payout side RAM 464.

  In a succeeding step S2007, it is determined whether or not the frequency information read in the step S2005 is 1 or more. If the frequency information is 1 or more, in step S2008, a return command including the read frequency information is set as an output target to the management side MPU 472. The return command is output to the management side MPU 472 after the return management process is completed. Thereafter, in step S2009, a frequency information initialization process is executed. Specifically, the frequency information storage area 464a is cleared to “0” and the frequency display unit 447 is controlled to display “0” on the frequency display unit 447 of the operation unit 441.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2007, or if the process of step S2009 is executed, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the remaining sphere information read in step S2006 is 1 or more. If the remaining sphere information is “0”, the return management process is terminated as it is. If the remaining sphere information is 1 or more, in step S2011, a return command including the read remaining sphere information is set as an output target to the management side MPU 472. In this case, if the return command has already been set as the output target in step S2008, the read remaining ball information is included in the return command in a state distinguished from the frequency information. As described above, the return command is output to the management MPU 472 after the return management process is completed. Thereafter, in step S2012, an initialization process for remaining sphere information is executed. Specifically, the remaining sphere information storage area 464b is cleared to “0” and the remaining number display unit 448 is controlled to display “0” on the remaining number display unit 448 of the operation unit 441. Thereafter, the return management process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2002, the return management process is terminated after the management process for partial return is executed in step S2013. The management process for partial return will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the increase instruction button 444 of the operation unit 441 has been operated. When the increase instruction button 444 is operated, in step S2102, the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 464c provided in the payout side RAM 464 is stored in the remaining ball information storage area of the payout side RAM 464. It is determined whether it is less than the remaining sphere information of 464b.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, a partial return addition process is executed in step S2103. Specifically, the storage area 464c is updated so that the value of the partial return ball information storage area 464c is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S2104, a display update process for partial return is executed. In this process, the remaining number display unit 448 is display-controlled so that the number corresponding to the partially returned ball information stored in the partially returned ball information storage area 464c is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448. That is, the remaining number display section 448 basically displays the number corresponding to the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b, but when a partial return operation is performed. The remaining number display unit 448 is also used as a display unit for displaying the number corresponding to the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 464c.

  Thereafter, in step S 2105, “5000” is set in the partially returning counter provided in the payout side RAM 464. The partial returning counter is a counter for measuring the valid period of the operation when the increase instruction button 444 or the decrease instruction button 445 of the operation unit 441 is operated.

  When the value of the partially returning counter is 1 or more, the remaining number display portion 448 displays the number corresponding to the partially returned ball information stored in the partially returned ball information storage area 464c. When the value of the part returning counter becomes “0”, the number corresponding to the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b is displayed on the remaining number display section 448. Further, the value of the partially returning counter is cleared to “0” when the condition establishment signal becomes the HI level, and is also cleared to “0” when the all return button 443 is operated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the decrease instruction button 445 of the operation unit 441 has been operated. If the decrease instruction button 445 is operated, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the partial return ball information in the partial return ball information storage area 464c provided in the payout side RAM 464 is 1 or more. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, a partial return subtraction process is executed in step S2108. Specifically, the storage area 464c is updated so that the value of the partial return ball information storage area 464c is decremented by 1.

  In a succeeding step S2109, a display update process for partial return is executed. In this process, the remaining number display unit 448 is display-controlled so that the number corresponding to the partially returned ball information stored in the partially returned ball information storage area 464c is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448. Thereafter, in step S2110, “5000” is set in the partially returning counter of the payout side RAM 464.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, it is determined in step S2111 whether or not the determination button 446 of the operation unit 441 has been operated. If the enter button 446 is operated, in step S2112 a return command including the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 464c is set as an output target to the management MPU 472. As a result, partial return ball information corresponding to the operation of the increase instruction button 444 and the decrease instruction button 445 is output toward the management side MPU 472.

  In a succeeding step S2113, the partially returning counter is cleared to “0”. In step S2114, the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 464c is subtracted from the residual ball information stored in the residual ball information storage area 464b, and the information of the subtraction result is newly updated. The remaining sphere information storage area 464b is overwritten as the remaining sphere information. At this time, the value of the partially returned ball information storage area 464c is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S2115, display control of the remaining number display unit 448 is performed so that the number corresponding to the remaining ball information stored in the remaining ball information storage area 464b is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448.

  When a negative determination is made at step S2102, when a process at step S2105 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S2107, when a process at step S2110 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S2111, or step If the process of S2115 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2116. In step S2116, it is determined whether the value of the partially returning counter is 1 or more.

  If the value of the partial return counter is “0”, the management process for partial return is terminated as it is, and if it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2117. In step S2117, 1 is subtracted from the value of the partially returning counter. In a succeeding step S2118, it is determined whether or not the value of the partially returning counter is “0”. If the value of the partial return counter is not “0”, the management process for partial return is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, it is stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b in step S2119. The remaining number display unit 448 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the remaining remaining ball information is displayed on the remaining number display unit 448. At this time, the value of the partially returned ball information storage area 464c is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the management process for partially returning is completed.

  Here, when the increase instruction button 444 or the decrease instruction button 445 is operated, “5000” is set in the partially returning counter. Further, when the output of the LOW level condition establishment signal is continued and the all return button 443 is not operated, the value of the partly returning counter every time the return management process (FIG. 42) is activated. 1 is subtracted. The return management process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 35) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. When the value of the partial return counter becomes “0”, the partial return operation up to that point is invalidated. That is, even if the increase instruction button 444 or the decrease instruction button 445 is operated, any of the increase instruction button 444, the decrease instruction button 445, and the determination button 446 until a predetermined period (specifically, 20 sec) elapses. If is not operated, the operation for partial return up to that point is invalidated.

  Next, management processing for medium supply executed by the management side MPU 472 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process for medium supply is executed in step S908 of the main process (FIG. 27) in the management side MPU 472.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is in a returning state by determining whether or not “1” is set in a returning flag provided in the management-side RAM 474. If it is not in the returning state, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not a return command has been received from the payout side MPU 462. As described above, the return command is transmitted from the payout MPU 462 when the full return button 443 of the operation unit 441 is operated, or when the decision button 446 is operated after a partial return operation. In addition, the return command transmitted based on the operation of the determination button 446 includes only the remaining sphere information, whereas the return command transmitted based on the operation of the all return button 443 includes the frequency information and There are cases where only one of the remaining sphere information is included and cases where both of them are included.

  If the return command has not been received, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated as it is. If a return command has been received, it is determined in step S2203 whether frequency information is included in the current return command. If frequency information is included, a write instruction signal is transmitted to the medium circuit 477 so that the frequency information is written to the storage medium M in step S2204. As a result, the medium circuit 477 writes the frequency information in the storage medium M. After that, in step S2205, the return state is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, or if the process of step S2205 is executed, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not the remaining return ball information is included in the current return command. If the remaining sphere information is not included, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated as it is.

  If the remaining sphere information is included, a write instruction signal is transmitted to the medium circuit 477 so that the remaining sphere information is written to the storage medium M in step S2207. As a result, the medium circuit 477 writes the remaining sphere information in the storage medium M. In this case, if the current return command includes not only the remaining sphere information but also the frequency information, and the process of step S2204 is executed, the remaining sphere information is stored in the storage medium M in which the frequency information is written. Is written to. In the following step S2208, when the return state is not yet set, the return state is set. Thereafter, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is in the returning state, it is determined in step S2209 whether writing to the storage medium M is completed in the medium circuit 477. If the writing has not been completed, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated as it is. When the writing is completed, in step S2210, the drive unit 476c provided corresponding to the medium discharge port 434 in the management unit 431 is driven and controlled, so that the storage medium M that has been written is recorded as a medium. It discharges from the discharge port 434. Thereafter, in step S2211, the medium supply management process is terminated after the returning state is canceled.

  Next, the display content of the remaining number display unit 448 when the partial return of the remaining sphere information is executed will be described. 45A to 45D are front views of the operation unit 441. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45A, in the situation where “25” corresponding to the frequency information is displayed on the frequency display portion 447 and “7243” corresponding to the remaining sphere information is displayed on the remaining number display portion 448, As shown in FIG. 45 (b), based on the increase instruction button 444 being operated, the remaining number display portion 448 displays the number corresponding to the partially returned ball information. In this case, the remaining number display portion 448 displays “52” corresponding to the partially returned ball information.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 45 (c), for example, the reduction instruction button 445 is operated so that the number of shot balls corresponding to coffee is reached, and the partial return ball information displayed on the remaining number display portion 448 is “50”. ”Is adjusted. When the enter button 446 is operated in this state, the storage medium M in which the remaining ball information “50” is written is ejected. Also, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the remaining number display section 448 displays the number (“7193”) corresponding to the remaining sphere information in a state where it is subtracted by the number of the partially returned launched spheres. Is done.

  As already described, in this pachinko machine 310, a large number of fired balls are circulated, and the player cannot touch the fired balls. Further, when a winning occurs, the prize ball is given to the player as remaining ball information. Is done. Therefore, it is not possible to exchange drinks or cigarettes using actual launch balls in the game hall. On the other hand, not only the total return of the remaining ball information but also a partial return of the remaining ball information is possible, so that the remaining ball information necessary for the game remains in the pachinko machine 310 and the amount necessary for the above exchange. It becomes possible for the player to obtain the storage medium M in which only the data is written, and the above exchange can be suitably performed.

  In addition, when the player performs an operation for partial return to the operation unit 441, the storage medium M in which the number of remaining ball information corresponding to the operation is written is ejected from the management unit 431. . Thereby, the player can exchange the product by handing the storage medium M directly to the store clerk on the game hall side. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand the exchange operation of the product.

  Further, in a situation where the player is operating the firing operation device 336, the operation for partial return is invalidated. This prohibits the processing for providing the storage medium M in a situation where the subtraction processing of the remaining sphere information accompanying the launch operation is being performed, and allows the remaining sphere information to be handled accurately. It becomes. In addition, since the launch ball is prioritized, for example, when a partial return operation is performed during the round game in the open / close execution mode, the launch ball is stopped accordingly. The situation is prevented.

  In addition, since the operation unit 441 is provided with operation buttons 444 to 446 for partial return, when exchanging for a product using a part of the remaining ball information, the player can use the dedicated operation button. What is necessary is just to operate 444-446. Therefore, the operability for the player at the time of such exchange can be improved.

  Further, since the number of remaining sphere information to be used is specified by operating the operation buttons 444 to 446, it is not necessary to provide an operation button for each type of product to be exchanged. Therefore, the number of operation buttons can be reduced.

<ID registration process>
Next, the ID registration process executed in step S1404 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 35) will be described.

  Prior to the description of the ID registration process, the configuration of the launch ball used in the pachinko machine 310 will be described. FIG. 46A is a longitudinal sectional view of the launch ball, and FIG. 46B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the IC tag 481 embedded in the launch ball.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the launch ball is formed in a spherical shape using a non-conductive synthetic resin such as ABS resin as a base material, and an IC tag 481 is embedded in the base material. . The IC tag 481 is formed in a size smaller than the launch ball, for example, 3.5 mm × 3.5 mm × 0.8 mm, and is embedded in the center of the launch ball. Further, the IC tag 481 is not exposed on the surface of the launch ball, and the IC tag 481 is surrounded by a base material.

  The IC tag 481 is a passive tag, and includes an IC chip 482 and an antenna member 483 as shown in FIG. The IC chip 482 is formed as an integrated circuit and has a control unit and a memory area. The memory area is configured by a non-volatile memory (ROM) in which data cannot be rewritten, and its storage capacity is, for example, 128 bits. In the memory area, ID information unique to the launch ball is stored as identification information.

  The ID information unique to the launch ball is set so that there is no other launch ball having the same ID information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible that the fired balls having the same ID information exist with a considerably low probability (for example, a probability of 1 / 100,000), and the same within the same game hall. The launch ball having the ID information may be absent, or the launch ball having the same ID information may not be present in the same pachinko machine 310. In order to individually recognize each launch ball in the pachinko machine 310, it is only necessary that at least the ID information of each launch ball circulating in the same pachinko machine 310 is different.

  The antenna member 483 has a fine line shape and is formed using a metal such as aluminum or copper. The antenna member 483 is formed as a spiral antenna so as to make a plurality of rounds around the IC chip 482 so that the IC chip 482 exists at the center thereof. The antenna member 483 is set to a predetermined length dimension so that the operating frequency becomes a predetermined frequency (specifically, 2.45 GHz).

  The ID information of the IC chip 482 is configured to be called by the control unit and transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna member 483. The antenna member 483 has a communicable distance set to about 3 cm, and when the launch ball is held at the launch standby position on the launch rail 212, the reader device 385 provided around the launch standby position is It is included in the range of the communicable distance.

  The reader device 385 outputs a ringing wave based on an instruction from the payout side MPU 462. When the ringing wave is output, the IC chip 482 is activated and includes ID information from the antenna member 483. Radio waves are output as response waves. As a result, the ID information of the launch ball held at the launch standby position on the launch rail 212 can be read by the reader device 385.

  On the other hand, a launch ball that is not held at the launch standby position, for example, a launch ball that is prevented from moving to the launch rail 212 by the ball supply device 213, a launch that is present on the game area PA side from the launch rail 212 The reader device 385 is not included in the communicable distance for the ball and the launch ball existing on the back side of the support base body 331. Therefore, the reader device 385 does not receive a response wave from a launch ball that is not held at the launch standby position.

  Here, since the synthetic ball is used as the base material for the launch ball as described above, there is a concern that it becomes extremely light compared to a conventional game ball formed using a metal. If the shot ball is extremely lighter than before, the manner of flowing down the game area is greatly different, and there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46A, a plurality of weight pieces 484 for weight adjustment are dispersed and embedded in the launch ball. The weight piece 484 is formed of a metal such as lead so that the weight per unit volume is larger than that of the base material. The embedding positions of the plurality of weight pieces 484 are set so that the center of gravity of the projecting ball comes to the center. The plurality of weight pieces 484 are embedded so as not to be exposed on the surface of the projecting ball. In addition, the weight pieces 484 are spaced apart so as not to disturb the communication of the IC tag 481. This enables the reader device 385 to read the ID information from the launch ball, while making the launch ball flowing down the game area PA feel less uncomfortable than the conventional metal game ball. It becomes.

  In addition, the base part formed using the base material made of synthetic resin in the launch ball, the central part formed of a relatively flexible base material so that the IC tag 481 and the weight piece 484 can be easily embedded, You may form so that it may have an outer layer which is formed with a comparatively hard base material and is hard to generate | occur | produce wear and a deformation | transformation at the time of discharge | release of a launch ball or the flow of a game area.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the ID registration process.

  The pachinko machine 310 has a predetermined number (specifically, 100) of firing balls set in advance, and the particular number of firing balls circulates in the pachinko machine 310 during the game. Become. In the ID registration process, ID information is read from each of the specific number of shot balls, and a process of storing each read ID information in the payout side RAM 464 is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the ID registration execution state is set. If not in the ID registration execution state, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not a command corresponding to the start of ID registration has been received from the main MPU 452.

  A command corresponding to the start of ID registration is transmitted from the main MPU 452 to the payout MPU 462 when the second delete button 361c provided in the main control device 361 is operated. The second erase button 361c is used to set a new specific number of shot balls when the number of shot balls set in the pachinko machine 310 is less than a specific number or more than a specific number. It is operated when it goes to.

  By the way, when discharging a specific number of launch balls already set in the pachinko machine 310 and setting a new specific number of launch balls, first unlock the front door 322 with respect to the main body base 321. The front door 322 is opened. Thereafter, an operator directly applies an external force to the supply member of the ball supply device 213 to place the supply member at the supply position. As a result, all of the launch balls stored in the launch supply passage section 215 are discharged through the ball supply device 213. After all of the old set of fire balls are discharged, a specific number of new balls of the new set are thrown into the circulation storage tank 231.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2302, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not “1” is set in the ID registration flag provided in the payout side RAM 464. The ID registration flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the ID information is registered for a specific number of each projecting ball. Further, the ID registration flag is used when the supply of backup power to the payout side RAM 464 is stopped or the initialization process of the payout side RAM 464 is executed even after the ID information is registered. “0” is cleared.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the ID registration process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, or if a negative determination is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, the ID registration execution state is set. In a succeeding step S2305, an erasing process of the ID information storage area 464d provided in the payout side RAM 464 is executed. The ID information storage area 464d is an area for storing ID information read from the set specific number of shot balls.

  In the following step S2306, the output state of the ID registration signal is set to the HI level. The ID registration signal is a signal that is output from the payout side MPU 462 toward the launch control device 365, and even if the launch operation device 336 is not operated, the launch ball is played in order to register the ID information. When the ball supply device 213 and the firing solenoid 214 are driven and controlled to fire toward the area PA, the HI level is set. Thereby, the launch control device 365 executes launch control for ID registration. The details of the launch control will be described later in detail.

  When the ID registration execution state is set, a registration start command is output from the payout MPU 462 to the main MPU 452, and when the ID registration execution state is canceled, registration is performed from the payout MPU 462 to the main MPU 452. An end command may be output. In this case, when the registration start command is received, the main MPU 452 outputs a registration start notification command to the sound emission control device 91, and when the registration end command is received, the main MPU 452 ends the registration toward the sound emission control device 91. By outputting the notification command, the notification to that effect may be executed by the speaker device 338 or the symbol display device 61 in the ID registration execution state.

  In subsequent step S2307, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level. Thereby, even if the launch operation device 336 is operated and the remaining sphere information is 1 or more, launch control is performed in an ID registration mode. Thereafter, the ID registration process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the ID registration is being executed, the launch management process at the time of ID registration is executed in step S2308, and the ID acquisition process is executed in step S2309, followed by the real ID registration. The process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the launch management process and the ID acquisition process at the time of ID registration will be described. First, the launch management process at the time of ID registration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether or not it is in an interrupted state by determining whether or not “1” is set in the interrupt flag provided in the payout side RAM 464. If it is not in the suspended state, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the front door 322 is being opened. If the front door 322 is not open, the launch management process at the time of registering the real ID is terminated. If the front door 322 is open, the interruption state is set in step S2403, and the output state of the ID registration signal is set to the LOW level in the subsequent step S2404. Thereafter, the launch management process at the time of registration of the present ID is terminated. That is, even when the launch ball is automatically fired in the ID registration mode, when the front door 322 is opened, the launch of the launch ball is interrupted.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that it is in an interrupted state, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the front door 322 is closed. If the front door 322 is not closed, the launch management process at the time of registering the real ID is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the front door 322 is closed, the interrupted state is canceled in step S2406, and the output state of the ID registration signal is set to the HI level in subsequent step S2407. Thereafter, the launch management process at the time of registration of the present ID is terminated. Thereby, the firing of the fired ball in the ID registration mode is resumed.

  Here, the ID control launch control process executed by the launch control device 365 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the ID control launch control process is executed in step S1814 in the launch control process (FIG. 40).

  In step S2501, it is determined whether the ID registration signal output from the payout side MPU 462 is at the HI level. If the ID registration signal is at the HI level, 1 is added to the value of the second firing period counter provided in the launch control device 365 in step S2502, and if the ID registration signal is at the LOW level. In step S2503, the value of the second firing period counter is cleared to “0”. The second firing cycle counter is used to set the firing cycle of the launch ball to a predetermined one in a situation where the launch ball should be launched using the ball supply device 213 and the launch solenoid 214 when registering the ID information. It is a counter.

  When the process of step S2502 is executed or when the process of step S2503 is executed, it is determined in step S2504 whether the second ball has been fed. The state where the second ball has been fed is a state where supply of one shot ball onto the launch rail 212 by the ball supply device 213 has already been completed at the time of registration of ID information.

  If the second ball has not been fed, it is determined in step S2505 whether the value of the second firing period counter is “100”. The second firing period counter is incremented by 1 each time the firing control process is activated in a state where the ID registration signal is at the HI level. Further, the launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, the value of the second firing period counter is “100” means that the output state of the HI level continues after the ID registration signal becomes HI level, or one This means that 0.2 sec has passed in a state where the output state of the HI level ID registration signal has continued since the launch ball was launched for registration of ID information.

  Here, the launch cycle is shorter than the launch cycle (specifically, 0.6 sec) when the launch ball is fired based on the operation of the launch operation device 336 by the player. This makes it possible to fire the fired ball in a short period when registering ID information while shortening the period required for registering ID information, while making the firing period of the fired ball somewhat long when playing games. .

  If the value of the second firing period counter is not “100”, the firing control process for this ID registration is terminated as it is. When the value of the second firing period counter is “100”, the process proceeds to step S2506 to step S2508.

  In step S2506, the value of the second firing period counter is cleared to “0”. In step S2507, a driving signal for ball feeding is output to the ball supply device 213. In step S2508, the second ball feeding completed state is set. Set. Thereafter, the firing control process for registering this ID is terminated. When a driving signal for ball feeding is output, the ball supply device 213 supplies one shot ball onto the shot rail 212.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, 1 is added to the value of the second post-ball feed counter provided in the firing control device 365 in step S2509. The counter after the second ball feeding is a timing at which the firing solenoid 214 is driven and controlled to be fired after one firing ball is supplied onto the firing rail 212 by the ball supply device 213 at the time of registration of ID information. This is a counter for specifying in the firing control device 365.

  In a succeeding step S2510, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is “50”. When the second ball feeding counter is in the ID registration execution state, 1 is added each time the launch control process is started in the second ball feeding completed state. Further, the launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, the case where the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is “50” means that 0.1 sec has passed after one shot ball is supplied on the shot rail 212. During the time from when one launch ball is supplied on the launch rail 212 until the launch ball is fired for registration of ID information, the launch ball detection sensor 384 detects the launch ball, and the reader device It is set to a time longer than the longest time required for 385 to be driven and to read the ID information from the fired ball. Therefore, it is possible to reliably read the ID information.

  When the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is not “50”, the firing control process for the real ID registration is finished as it is. When the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is “50”, the process proceeds to step S2511 to step S2512.

  In step S2511, a driving signal for launching corresponding to the ID registration is output to firing solenoid 214. As a result, the launch ball supplied on the launch rail 212 is launched at a launch intensity corresponding to the registration of ID information. In this case, the firing strength is uniquely determined regardless of the operation amount of the operation handle 336b, and is set so that the fired launch ball surely reaches the game area PA. Thereafter, in step S2512, after releasing the second ball fed state, the firing control process for main ID registration is ended.

  Next, the ID acquisition process executed by the payout MPU 462 in step S2309 of the ID registration process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in a registration detection flag provided in the payout-side RAM 464. As already described, the registration detection flag is a flag that is set when a launch ball is supplied to the launch rail 212 in the ID registration execution state and the launch ball is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 384.

  If “1” is set in the registering detection flag, ringing wave output processing is executed in step S2602. Specifically, an output instruction signal for instructing the output of the ringing wave is output from the payout side MPU 462 toward the reader device 385. As a result, a ringing wave having a predetermined frequency set in common in the IC tag 481 of each launch ball is output from the reader device 385. Thereafter, the registration detection flag is cleared to “0” in step S2603.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the process of step S2603 is executed, it is determined in step S2604 whether the reader device 385 has received a response wave from the launch ball. If the response wave has not been received, the present ID acquisition process is terminated. If a response wave has been received, ID information search processing is executed in step S2605. In the ID information search process, the reader device 385 grasps whether or not the ID information included in the response wave received this time is already stored in the ID information storage area 464d of the payout side RAM 464.

  In a succeeding step S2606, it is determined whether or not the ID information received this time is already stored in the ID information storage area 464d. If it has already been stored, the ID acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the ID information received this time is not stored in the ID information storage area 464d, the ID information is written in the ID information storage area 464d in step S2607.

  In a succeeding step S2608, it is determined whether or not the ID information stored in the ID information storage area 464d has reached a specific number, specifically 100. If the specific number is not reached, the ID acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the specific number has been reached, the ID acquisition process is terminated after the ID registration execution state is canceled in step S2609.

<ID monitoring process>
Next, the ID monitoring process executed in step S1405 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 35) will be described.

  The ID monitoring process is a process for executing monitoring of the fired ball circulating in the pachinko machine 310 in a situation where the fired ball is being launched toward the game area based on the operation of the launch operation device 336. In addition, the monitoring is always performed in a situation where a launch ball is being launched toward the game area based on the operation of the launch operation device 336.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the ID monitoring process.

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the post-output state of the calling wave is set by determining whether or not “1” is set in the post-output flag provided in the payout side RAM 464. If it is not in the post-output state, it is determined in step S2702 whether or not “1” is set in the normal medium detection flag provided in the payout side RAM 464. As described above, the normal detection flag indicates that the launch ball is supplied to the launch rail 212 based on the operation of the launch operation device 336, and the launch ball is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 384. This flag is set in the case.

  If “1” is set in the normal detection flag, ringing wave output processing is executed in step S2703. Specifically, an output instruction signal for instructing the output of the ringing wave is output from the payout side MPU 462 toward the reader device 385. As a result, a ringing wave having a predetermined frequency set in common in the IC tag 481 of each launch ball is output from the reader device 385. Thereafter, in step S2704, the normal detection flag is cleared to “0”, and in step S2705, the state after the output of the ringing wave is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2701 that the state is after the ringing wave is output, it is determined in step S2706 whether the reader device 385 has received a response wave from the launch ball. If no response wave has been received, the value of the reception waiting counter provided in the payout side RAM 464 is incremented by 1 in step S2707. The reception waiting counter is a counter for specifying, in the payout side MPU 462, the reception waiting time of the response wave after the ringing wave is output from the reader device 385 when monitoring the emitted ball.

  In the following step S2708, it is determined whether or not the value of the reception waiting counter is “75”. The ID monitoring process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 35) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. Further, the process of step S2707 is executed every time the ID monitoring process is executed until the response wave is received in the state after the ringing wave is output. Therefore, in step S2708, it is determined whether 0.3 sec has elapsed without receiving a response wave after outputting the ringing wave from the reader device 385.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2708, the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 212 and detected by the firing ball detection sensor 384 cannot transmit a response wave to the output of the calling wave of the reader device 385. It means that it is a non-regular game ball. In this case, after outputting the first ID abnormality command to the main MPU 452 in step S2709, the infinite loop is continued as it is.

  When the main MPU 452 receives the first ID abnormality command, the main MPU 452 performs a setting for making an affirmative determination in step S1006 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28), thereby stopping the progress of the subsequent game and emitting the sound. By outputting a command corresponding to the first ID abnormality command to the control device 91, abnormality notification corresponding to the first ID abnormality is executed. Although the mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, the game hall manager can recognize that the first ID abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 353, the speaker device 338, and the symbol display device 61. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 310 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of the first ID abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  As a case where an irregular game ball that does not output a response wave exists in the pachinko machine 310, for example, an illegal act of throwing a game ball smaller than the regular launch ball into the pachinko machine 310 is assumed. When such a small game ball is thrown in, a winning is more likely to occur than a regular launch ball. In addition, since the used game balls circulate in the pachinko machine 310 without being discharged, a small irregular game ball is repeatedly used in the pachinko machine 310. On the other hand, by executing the processing as described above, it is possible to prohibit the use of the launch ball and the provision of the storage medium M when the illegal act is performed. In addition, through the execution of the abnormality notification, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the first ID abnormality has occurred.

  The abnormal state is canceled by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 310 while operating both the first erase button 361b and the second erase button 361c after the power of the pachinko machine 310 is turned off. The pachinko machine 310 may be released only by turning on the power again. The pachinko machine 310 may be released by operating at least one of the first and second erasing buttons 361b and 361c without requiring the power to be turned on again. It is good also as a structure to be made. In addition, when the first ID is abnormal, while notifying the abnormality, it may be configured not to prohibit at least some of the use of the fired ball, the provision of the storage medium M, and the progress of the game, and all of them are prohibited. It is good also as a structure which does not.

  Here, the content of the ID information monitoring process when the ball is being fired based on the launch operation by the player and the content when the first ID abnormality occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  52 (a) shows the firing cycle, FIG. 52 (b) shows the state of the ball feeding operation, FIG. 52 (c) shows the state of the firing operation, and FIG. 52 (d) does not cause the first ID abnormality. FIG. 52 (e) shows the response wave reception when no first ID abnormality occurs, and FIG. 52 (f) shows the calling wave output when the first ID abnormality occurs. FIG. 52 (g) shows how the response wave is received when the first ID abnormality does not occur, and FIG. 52 (h) shows whether or not the first ID abnormality occurs.

  First, the contents of the ID information monitoring process when the first ID abnormality does not occur will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (e).

  When the measurement of the firing period is completed at the timing of t21, one launch ball is supplied onto the launch rail 212 by the ball supply device 213. The launch ball is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 384 at a timing t22 which is a timing before being launched, and a calling wave is output from the reader device 385 based on the detection. Thereafter, a response wave is output from the launch ball at the timing of t23, and the payout side MPU 462 receives the ID information of the launch ball. Then, at the timing of t24, the firing ball on the firing rail 212 is fired by the firing solenoid 214. Further, such an operation is repeated also at the timing t25.

  Next, a case where the first ID abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c) and FIGS. 52 (f) to 52 (h).

  As in the case where the first ID abnormality does not occur, one game ball is supplied onto the launch rail 212 by the ball supply device 213 by completing the measurement of the launch cycle at the timing of t21, and the leader at the timing of t22. A ringing wave is output from the device 385. However, no response wave is output from the game ball, and the reception waiting time elapses. Then, at the timing of t31, the occurrence of the first ID abnormality is identified, and the already explained abnormality handling process is executed.

  In this case, the timing specified as the occurrence of the first ID abnormality is a timing before the timing at which the measurement of the next firing cycle is completed (timing at t25). This makes it possible to find a non-regular game ball because it receives ID information from a normal launch ball that is supplied next, even though it has not received ID information from a non-normal game ball. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that it becomes impossible to perform the process.

  By the way, the timing specified as the occurrence of the first ID abnormality is the timing after the non-regular game ball is fired, but when the first ID abnormality occurs, the progress of the subsequent game is prevented. Therefore, unauthorized acquisition of profits by the unauthorized game ball is prevented.

  Returning to the description of the ID monitoring process (FIG. 51), if an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, that is, if the reader device 385 receives a response wave from the launch ball before the reception waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to step S2710. move on. In step S2710, the state after the ringing wave is output is canceled, and in step S2711, the value of the reception waiting counter is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, in step S2712, ID information comparison processing is executed. In the ID information comparison process, it is specified whether or not the ID information received this time matches any of a specific number of ID information stored in the ID information storage area 464d of the payout-side RAM 464. In the subsequent step S2713, it is determined whether or not the ID information received this time matches any ID information in the ID information storage area 464d as a result of the comparison process in step S2712.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2713, the game ball supplied on the launch rail 212 and detected by the launch ball detection sensor 384 has irregular ID information that is different from the ID information registered in the pachinko machine 310. It means that it is a game ball. In this case, after outputting the second ID abnormality command to the main MPU 452 in step S2714, the infinite loop is continued as it is.

  When the main MPU 452 receives the second ID abnormality command, the main MPU 452 performs a setting to make an affirmative determination in step S1006 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28), thereby stopping the progress of the subsequent game and emitting the sound. By outputting a command corresponding to the second ID abnormality command to the control device 91, abnormality notification corresponding to the second ID abnormality is executed. Although the mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, the game hall manager can recognize that the second ID abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 353, the speaker device 338, and the symbol display device 61. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 310 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of the second ID abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  As a case where the non-regular game ball that outputs unregistered ID information exists in the pachinko machine 310, for example, an illegal act of throwing a game ball smaller than the regular launch ball into the pachinko machine 310 is assumed. When such a small game ball is thrown in, a win is more likely to occur than a regular launch ball as described above. In addition, since the used game balls circulate in the pachinko machine 310 without being discharged, a small irregular game ball is repeatedly used in the pachinko machine 310. On the other hand, by executing the processing as described above, it is possible to prohibit the use of the launch ball and the provision of the storage medium M when the illegal act is performed. In addition, through the execution of the abnormality notification, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the second ID abnormality has occurred.

  The abnormal state is canceled by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 310 while operating both the first erase button 361b and the second erase button 361c after the power of the pachinko machine 310 is turned off. The pachinko machine 310 may be released only by turning on the power again. The pachinko machine 310 may be released by operating at least one of the first and second erasing buttons 361b and 361c without requiring the power to be turned on again. It is good also as a structure to be made. In addition, when a second ID abnormality occurs, abnormality notification is performed, and at least a part of use of the fired ball, provision of the storage medium M, and progress of the game may be prohibited. It is good also as a structure which does not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2713, that is, if the ID information received this time matches any ID information stored in the ID information storage area 464d, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2715, in the ID information storage area 464d, “1” is set to the confirmed flag in the area where the same ID information as the currently received ID information is stored. Thereby, the payout side MPU 462 can specify that the ID information has been received from the launch ball having the ID information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2702, if a process in step S2705 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2708, or if a process in step S2715 is executed, then in step S2716, the payout side MPU 462 It is determined whether or not the launch permission signal output toward the launch control device 365 is in the HI level state. If the firing permission signal is in the LOW level, the ID monitoring process is terminated as it is. If the firing permission signal is in the HI level, the process from step S2717 is executed. That is, when the firing operation device 336 is operated by the player in a situation where the remaining ball information is 1 or more and the firing of the fired ball is permitted based on the operation, the processing from step S2717 is executed.

  In step S2717, 1 is added to the value of the monitoring cycle counter provided in the payout side RAM 464. The monitoring period counter measures the monitoring period when the payout-side MPU 462 specifies whether or not all the specific number of pieces of ID information stored in the ID information storage area 464d have been received during a predetermined monitoring period. It is a counter used to

  In the subsequent step S2718, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in all the confirmed flags in the ID information storage area 464d, whereby all of the specific number of ID information stored in the ID information storage area 464d is determined. Is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2718, all the confirmed flags are cleared to “0” in step S2719, and the monitoring period counter is cleared to “0” in step S2720, and then this ID monitoring process ends. .

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2718, it is determined in step S2721 whether or not the value of the monitoring cycle counter is “60000”. The ID monitoring process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 35) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. Further, when the shooting operation device 336 is operated by the player in a situation where the remaining ball information is 1 or more and the shooting ball is permitted to be released based on the operation, the process of step S2717 is executed each time the ID monitoring process is executed. The Therefore, in step S2721, it is determined whether or not 240 seconds have elapsed as the monitoring period in the situation where the fired ball is being fired based on the launch operation by the player. By the way, the measurement of the monitoring period is interrupted when the launching of the launch ball based on the launch operation by the player is interrupted (that is, when the launch permission signal becomes LOW level), When the firing of the fired ball is resumed (that is, when the firing permission signal becomes the HI level), the measurement is resumed from the value measured before the interruption.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2721, the ID monitoring process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2721, a part of the specific number of launch balls thrown into the pachinko machine 310 has flowed out of the pachinko machine 310, or a ball is clogged in the game area or the path of the launch ball. Means that In this case, in step S2722, the third ID abnormality command is output to the main MPU 452, and then this ID monitoring process is terminated.

  When the main MPU 452 receives the third ID abnormality command, the main side MPU 452 outputs a command corresponding to the third ID abnormality command to the sound emission control device 91, thereby executing abnormality notification corresponding to the third ID abnormality. Like that. Although the mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, the game hall manager can recognize that the third ID abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 353, the speaker device 338, and the symbol display device 61. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 310 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of the third ID abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  However, unlike the case of the first ID abnormality and the second ID abnormality, in the case of the third ID abnormality, the subsequent processing is not stopped in the payout side MPU 462, and the timer interruption processing (FIG. 28) is also performed in the main side MPU 452. Setting for making an affirmative determination in step S1006 is not performed. That is, in the case of the third ID abnormality, the process for proceeding the game in the main MPU 452 is not stopped, and the process for using the firing ball and the storage medium M are discharged also in the payout MPU 462. The process is not stopped.

  When the third ID abnormality occurs, as described above, when a part of the specific number of launch balls flows out of the pachinko machine 310, or when some of the launch balls remain in the game area or the passage path of the launch balls It is thought that. Such an event is unlikely to occur due to cheating, and even if it occurs due to cheating, the disadvantage that the game hall suffers is smaller than in the case of the first ID abnormality or the second ID abnormality. It is done. Therefore, with regard to the third ID abnormality, emphasis is placed on the disadvantage of allowing a regular player to suspend the game, so that the processing regarding the progress of the game, the use of the launch ball and the discharge of the storage medium M is not interrupted. . In addition, when a third ID abnormality occurs, a notification about the abnormality occurrence is executed, so it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate the third ID abnormality.

  Note that the abnormal state is canceled by operating at least one of the first erase button 361b and the second erase button 361c without requiring the power of the pachinko machine 310 to be turned on again. 310 may be required to be turned on again. In addition, in the case of the third ID abnormality, in addition to the abnormality notification, at least a part of the use of the launch ball, the provision of the storage medium M, and the progress of the game may be prohibited, and all of them may be prohibited. It is good also as a structure.

  As described above, when ID information cannot be received from the fired ball by the reader device 385 in a situation where the fired ball is detected by the fired ball detection sensor 384, an abnormality process is executed. As a result, when an irregular game ball that cannot transmit ID information is thrown into the pachinko machine 310, it is possible to cope with it.

  Further, the ID information of the launch ball circulating in the pachinko machine 310 is stored in the ID information storage area 464d, and when the ID information different from the stored ID information is received, the abnormality process is executed. . This makes it possible to deal with a case where a non-regular game ball that does not have regular ID information is thrown into the pachinko machine 310.

  In addition, each of the launch balls circulating in the pachinko machine 310 has different ID information, and these ID information is stored in the ID information storage area 464d. If all the ID information stored in the ID information storage area 464d cannot be received within a predetermined monitoring period, an abnormality process is executed. Thereby, it is possible to monitor whether or not a ball clogging has occurred in the passage path of the shot ball such as the game area PA using reception of the ID information.

  Further, the reader device 385 is provided so as to receive the ID information from the launch ball supplied on the launch rail 212. Thereby, it becomes possible to monitor the shot ball during a normal game. In addition, it is possible to detect an abnormality related to reception of ID information at a timing before the abnormal target firing ball is fired toward the game area PA. Further, in the configuration in which the reader device 385 is provided as described above, the fire balls circulated in the pachinko machine 310 have different ID information, and these ID information is stored in the ID information storage area 464d. . This makes it possible to monitor the number of shot balls during a normal game.

<Residual sphere handling process executed by main MPU 452>
Next, the remaining sphere handling process executed by the main MPU 452 will be described. Prior to the description of the remaining ball handling process, the confirmation process for the reservation notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed in step S1302 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 34) in the main MPU 452.

  First, in step S2801, it is determined whether a new acquisition of hold information has been performed in the hold information acquisition process in the immediately preceding step S1301. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the confirmation process for this reservation notice is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, in step S2802, the jackpot determination information out of the newly acquired hold information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 is read.

  In a succeeding step S2803, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, by referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in step S2804, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning. In the case of the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning table for the high probability mode in step S2805. In this case, the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the low probability mode is more than the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the high probability mode. Although there are few types, the former numerical information is all included in the latter numerical information. Therefore, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result in the low probability mode is a jackpot result even in the high probability mode.

  When the process of step S2804 is executed or when the process of step S2805 is executed, it is determined in step S2806 whether or not it corresponds to a big win. If a negative determination is made in step S2806, the confirmation process for this reservation notice is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, in step S2807, the type determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the newly acquired hold information.

  In the following step S2808, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to an opening / closing execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode. Here, in this pachinko machine 310, as already described, as the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electric prize winning device 53 during the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. Frequency winning mode is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), a low probability big hit result, an explicit high probability big hit result, and a most advantageous big hit result are set as the big hit results. The jackpot result is an opportunity to shift to an opening / closing execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode. Therefore, in step S2808, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is one of the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the confirmation process for this reservation notice is ended as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, in step S2809, “1” is set in the generation flag corresponding to the area in which the newly acquired hold information is stored, and then the confirmation process for the hold notice is made. Exit.

  For details on the generation flag, as shown in FIG. 53C, the reserved storage area 454b of the main RAM 454 includes an execution area AE and first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4. In each of these areas, an occurrence flag is set in one-to-one correspondence with the area for storing the hold information. In addition, when starting a new game round, the hold information held in the first hold area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the hold information held in the second to fourth hold areas RE2 to RE4. Are shifted to the upper holding area. At this time, the data set in the generation flag is also shifted in accordance with the shift of the corresponding holding information. As described above, the occurrence flag is set to “1” when the corresponding hold information corresponds to the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is the high-frequency winning mode. In other words, it is possible to grasp whether or not the corresponding holding information corresponds to the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode by the occurrence flag.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the remaining sphere handling process. The remaining sphere handling process is executed in step S1019 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28) in the main MPU 452.

  In the remaining sphere handling process, it is determined whether or not the frequency information is 1 or more in step S2901, and it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere information is 10 or less in step S2902. As described above, the frequency information and the remaining ball information are transmitted from the payout side MPU 462 to the main side MPU 452 by executing the processing in step S1617 of the game ball management process (FIG. 37) in the payout side MPU 462. Is done. Further, the main-side MPU 452 grasps the frequency information and the remaining sphere information in the sphere management state reception process of step S1018 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, or if a negative determination is made in step S2902, the remaining ball handling process is terminated as is, a negative determination is made in step S2901, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2902. Then, the process proceeds to step S2903. That is, if the frequency information is “0” and the remaining sphere information is 10 or less, which is a predetermined reference number, the process proceeds to step S2903.

  In step S2903, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the generation flag corresponding to any of the hold information. If the total occurrence flag is “0”, the remaining sphere handling process is terminated. If “1” is set in any of the generation flags, the winning notification command is output to the sound emission control device 91 in step S2904, and then the remaining ball handling process is terminated.

  By outputting the winning notification command, at least one of the speaker device 338 and the symbol display device 61 is the high-frequency winning mode after the end of the current game round or after the end of the game round corresponding to the hold information stored on hold. In such a manner, the player is able to recognize the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  For example, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode after the end of the current game round, the symbol is displayed in all symbol rows at the timing before the symbol display on the symbol display device 61 is started. In a situation where the display is variably displayed, a situation where only a part of the symbol row is variably displayed, or after the timing when the reach variability display is started and before the reach variability display is terminated, "Please replenish." Is displayed and voice is output. In this case, in maintaining the degree of attention to the game through the prediction of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode occurs, after the timing when the reach variation display is started, as a kind of the reach effect or the reach effect and In addition, a configuration in which special notification is executed is preferable.

  The pachinko machine 310 is configured such that a specific number of fired balls circulate, and when the remaining ball information is not 1 or more, the fired ball cannot be fired based on the firing operation. In this case, in the situation where the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is “0” or a small number, the player frequently inserts a banknote when the high-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode occurs. Furthermore, the ball supply button 442 is further operated to replenish the remaining ball information. However, since a predetermined period is required until the replenishment is completed, the fired ball is fired during the predetermined period. The opening / closing execution mode will proceed without any failure. On the other hand, in the round game in the high-frequency winning mode, the upper limit time of opening of the special electricity winning device 53 is set so as to enable the upper limit number of winnings which is one end condition of the round game. If the fired ball is not fired for a predetermined period of time, the upper limit number of winnings may not be generated in a round game such as the first round. On the other hand, in the situation where the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number as described above, the game times corresponding to the on-hold information stored after the end of the current game times or on hold. In the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode after the end of the game, a special notification corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed to the player. As a result, the player can replenish the remaining ball information in advance before the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs, and the occurrence of the inconveniences described above can be prevented. .

  In addition, the timing at which the hold information is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode at a timing before the determination is made that the hold information is determined to be a game start target, specifically, the hold information is acquired. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special notification can be executed at an early stage, and for the player, the remaining ball information can be replenished with a margin before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the special notification is not executed when the hold information that is the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is stored. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the special notification is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

  Further, when the frequency information is stored, the special notification is not executed regardless of the value of the remaining sphere information. If the frequency information is stored, it is possible to convert to the remaining ball information at an early stage. Low. Therefore, by not performing the special notification when the frequency information is stored, the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the game ball launching mechanism 211 is provided at the upper left of the game area PA, it is possible to introduce the shot ball into the game area PA even if the firing intensity of the fired ball by the launch solenoid 214 is lower than before. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the firing solenoid 214.

  At least the front surface of the support base body 331 in the passage wall that divides the launch supply passage portion 215 is visually confirmed from the front of the main body base 321 in the launch supply passage portion 215. It is made transparent so as to make it possible. Further, the portion of the launch supply passage 215 that is formed transparently exists at a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 310 through the window panel 352 of the front door 322. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the launch ball is waiting in the launch supply passage portion 215 by visually confirming the launch supply passage portion 215 from the front of the pachinko machine 310.

  In addition, a standby detection sensor 216 is provided in the launch supply passage 215, and the detection result of the standby detection sensor 216 is a detection result in which the launch ball is not waiting in the launch supply passage 215. The game is stopped and error notification is executed. And when the said error state is cancelled | released, the state of the pachinko machine 310 will return to the state before the start of an error state. Accordingly, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to deal with a state in which the launch ball is not waiting in the launch supply passage portion 215 without causing any disadvantage to the player.

  Since the information on the number of usable launch balls is stored in the remaining ball information storage area 464b as the remaining ball information, it becomes possible to substitute the actual launched ball with the remaining ball information, and the launch in the game hall It becomes possible to suppress the total number of balls. In addition, even if the launch ball flows down in the game area, it will circulate in the pachinko machine 310, so it becomes possible to determine the number of launch balls used in the pachinko machine 310, and accordingly in the game hall It is possible to reduce the total number of fired balls.

  In such a configuration, the remaining ball information can be partially returned, so when the remaining ball information is used for purposes other than gaming, such as exchanging products in a game hall, several minutes according to the purpose of use. It becomes possible to use only. Thereby, in the configuration in which the actual ball is replaced with the remaining ball information as described above, it is possible to use the remaining ball information for exchanging commodities in the game hall. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which the launch ball circulates in the pachinko machine 310, since the player cannot take out the launch ball, the conventional exchange in the game hall in which the launch ball is exchanged for a product such as a drink is performed. Will not be able to. On the other hand, even if it is a configuration in which the launch ball is circulated by the pachinko machine 310 by allowing a part of the remaining ball information to be returned as described above, a game of exchanging with a product such as a drink is possible. Traditional exchanges in the hall are possible.

  Since the launch ball has an IC tag 481, it is possible to easily determine whether the launch ball is normal by reading the ID information from the launch ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably manage the launch ball. Further, the IC tag 481 is provided so as not to exist on the surface of the launch ball, and the launch ball is formed so that the radio wave from the IC tag 481 can be transmitted to the outside. The IC tag 481 can be protected while the information can be read.

  In the pachinko machine 310, the reader device 385 is provided so that the area through which the shot ball passes becomes the detection range, and the payout side MPU 462 performs monitoring processing using the ID information received by the reader device 385. This is a configuration. Thereby, it becomes possible to monitor the fired ball using the ID information by the pachinko machine 310 itself.

  When hold information for winning a big hit is stored and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number (10), a result display for the hold information is executed by the special figure display unit 62a. Before, the corresponding notification is executed to the player. This makes it possible to supplement the remaining ball information in advance before the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the hold information.

  In a predetermined situation, even if the all return button 443 of the operation unit 441 is operated, the storage medium M in which all the remaining sphere information is written is not discharged. As a result, if all of the remaining ball information can be disadvantageous to the player, or if the information output becomes complicated, the player can operate the all return button 443. It can be invalidated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for partially returning the remaining sphere information is different from that in the third embodiment. The different configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 55A is a schematic diagram for explaining a configuration of an operation part for performing partial return. In the present embodiment, an operation panel unit 491 is provided instead of the operation unit 441 in the third embodiment. The operation panel unit 491 includes a frequency display area 492 for displaying frequency information, a remaining number display area 493 for displaying remaining sphere information, and a plurality of designated operation areas 494a to 494 for instructing partial return. 494d, a ball supply operation area 495 for instructing supply of a ball, and a total return operation area 496 for instructing total return of remaining ball information are set. Among these, the designated operation areas 494a to 494d, the ball supply operation area 495, and the all return operation area 496 are touch panel types, and when these operation areas 494a to 496 are pressed, An operation generation signal corresponding to the operation areas 494a to 496 is output to the payout MPU 462, and the payout side MPU 462 can grasp which operation area 494a to 496 has been operated based on the operation generation signal.

  Specifically, the designated operation areas 494a to 494d have a predetermined number of launch balls to be partially returned in each of the designated operation areas 494a to 494d, and the number of the fired balls is determined by each designated operation area 494a. Are displayed in each of ˜494d. In addition, in each designated operation area 494a to 494d, information indicating what kind of merchandise is exchanged in the game hall for the number of corresponding partially returned launch balls is also displayed. Therefore, when the player wants to exchange a predetermined product in the game hall during the game, the player may press the designated operation areas 494a to 494d corresponding to the predetermined product. The payout control device 364 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC of the game hall, and if the pressing operation of the designated operation areas 494a to 494d is valid, a signal corresponding to the operation is output to the hall computer HC. As a result, the predetermined product is delivered to the player.

  Processing in the payout side MPU 462 for performing such partial return will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing a management process for partial return in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S3001, it is determined whether any one of the designated operation areas 494a to 494d is operated. If none of the designated operation areas 494a to 494d is operated, this management process is terminated as it is. If any one of the designated operation areas 494a to 494d is operated, the value of the remaining sphere information corresponding to the operation is grasped in step S3002. In the subsequent step S3003, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining sphere information grasped in step S3002 is equal to or less than the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3003, it is assumed that the current operation is not valid, and the present management process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3003, the current operation is valid. Then, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, a signal including the value of the remaining sphere information grasped in step S3002 and information for specifying the pachinko machine 310 is output to the hall computer HC.

  In the subsequent step S3005, the value obtained in step S3002 is subtracted from the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b, and the subtraction result is overwritten on the remaining sphere information storage area 464b. Thereafter, in step S3006, the display content of the remaining number display area 493 is updated to the content corresponding to the value of the remaining sphere information after the processing in step S3005, and then the management processing is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the designated operation areas 494a to 494d are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the exchangeable products, so that the player can designate the designated operation areas 494a to 494a corresponding to the products to be exchanged. It is only necessary to operate 494d, and the operability is improved. Further, since the necessary remaining ball number information is set to correspond to the designated operation areas 494a to 494d on a one-to-one basis, it is possible to output only the remaining ball number information necessary for merchandise exchange. Further, since the remaining ball information is output to the hall computer HC when the product is exchanged, the frequency with which the storage medium M is output can be suppressed.

  In addition, when any one of the designated operation areas 494a to 494d is operated, the value of the remaining sphere information corresponding to the designated operation area 494a corresponds to the operated designated operation areas 494a to 494d instead of the configuration in which the value is output to the hall computer HC. The product identification information may be output to the hall computer HC.

  Further, when any one of the designated operation areas 494a to 494d is operated, the value of the remaining sphere information corresponding to the designated operation area 494a corresponds to the operated designated operation areas 494a to 494d instead of being output to the hall computer HC. The storage medium M in which the value of the remaining sphere information is written may be ejected from the management unit 431. Alternatively, the storage medium M in which the identification information of the product corresponding to the operated designated operation areas 494a to 494d is written may be ejected from the management unit 431.

  In addition, the type of product that can be designated on the operation panel unit 491 and the remaining ball information corresponding to the product may be set in the game hall.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for partially returning the remaining sphere information is different from that in the third embodiment. The different configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 56A is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for partial return. In this embodiment, the operation unit 441 in the third embodiment is not provided with an operation part for partial return, but instead receives radio waves from an output device owned by the manager of the game hall. A receiving unit 501 and an approval button 502 that is operated by the player to approve the content received by the receiving unit 501. The receiving unit 501 and the approval button 502 are electrically connected to the payout control device 364.

  In the present embodiment, when a part of the remaining ball information is exchanged for a predetermined product, the player tells the game hall manager that the remaining ball corresponding to the predetermined product. A purchase signal including information is output from the output device to the pachinko machine 310. The purchase signal is received by the receiving unit 501, and when the player operates the approval button 502, after the remaining ball information is subtracted, a predetermined product is delivered to the player.

  Processing in the payout side MPU 462 for performing such partial return will be described. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing management processing for partial return in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S 3101, it is determined whether or not the approval waiting state is set by determining whether or not “1” is set in the approval waiting flag provided in the payout side RAM 464. If not in the approval waiting state, in step S3102, the receiving unit 501 determines whether or not a purchase signal has been received from the output device owned by the manager of the game hall. If the purchase signal has not been received, the management process is terminated as it is. If a purchase signal has been received, the management process is terminated after setting the approval waiting state in step S3103.

  On the other hand, if it is in the approval waiting state, an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 and the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the approval button 502 is operated. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction signal received from the launch control device 365 is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in either step S3104 or step S3105, the management process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in both step S3104 and step S3105, the approval waiting state is canceled in step S3106. In a succeeding step S3107, the value of the remaining sphere information included in the purchase signal is grasped. Thereafter, in step S3108, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining sphere information grasped in step S3107 is equal to or less than the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3108, it is assumed that the current operation is not valid, and the present management process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3108, the current operation is valid. Then, the process proceeds to step S3109. In step S3109, the value obtained in step S3107 is subtracted from the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 464b, and the subtraction result is overwritten on the remaining sphere information storage area 464b. Thereafter, in step S3110, the display content of the remaining number display unit 448 is updated to the content corresponding to the value of the remaining sphere information after the process of step S3109, and then the management process ends.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, since a signal is output from the game hall side when exchanging with a product using a part of the remaining ball information, the storage medium M is necessary for the exchange. And not. Therefore, the frequency with which the storage medium M is output can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to perform subtraction of the remaining ball information when exchanging the commodity, using an operation on the game hall side as at least one condition.

  Even if the receiving unit 501 receives a purchase signal from the game hall side, the remaining ball information is not subtracted unless the approval button 502 is operated by the player. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the remaining ball information from being subtracted against the player's intention. Further, the operation of the approval button 502 is invalidated in a situation where the firing operation device 336 is not operated. This makes it difficult to perform unauthorized operations on the approval button 502.

  The approval operation for receiving the purchase signal may be configured to require the input of a password set in advance by the player. In this case, an unauthorized approval operation can be more reliably prevented.

<Sixth Embodiment>
A modified example of the configuration in which special notification is executed when the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number and the mode is switched to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice in this modification, and FIG. 57B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a holding storage area 454b in this modification.

  First, the reserved storage area 454b will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the third embodiment, the reserved storage area 454b is provided with an execution area AE and first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4. In each of these areas, a combination of a determined flag, a jackpot flag, and a generation flag is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the area for storing the hold information.

  Of these flags, the occurrence flag is used to allow the main MPU 452 to specify whether or not the corresponding hold information corresponds to the jackpot result that triggers the switching to the opening / closing execution mode that is the high-frequency winning mode. Flag. The determined flag is a flag for enabling the main MPU 452 to specify whether or not the confirmation processing in step S3303 and later to be executed on the corresponding hold information has been executed. The jackpot flag allows the main MPU 452 to specify whether or not the corresponding hold information corresponds to either the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode or the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the low-frequency winning mode. Flag. At the start of a new game round, the holding information held in the first holding area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the holding information held in the second to fourth holding areas RE2 to RE4 is respectively changed. In this shift, the data set in the determined flag, the big hit flag, and the occurrence flag are also shifted to the upper side in accordance with the corresponding hold information shift. In addition, when this shift is completed, the area that is the shift target among the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 and is the lowest side (the fourth reservation area RE4 side) before the shift. As for, the determined flag, the jackpot flag and the occurrence flag are cleared to “0”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57 (a), a confirmation process for holding notice will be described.

  First, in step S3201, among the areas in which the hold information in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 454b and the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 is stored, there is an area in which “1” is not set in the determined flag. Determine if it exists. Note that the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the hold information that is the execution target of the game times, and the hold information stored in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. This is pending information that has not yet been executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the present confirmation processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202. In step S3202, whether or not there is an area in which “1” is set in the jackpot flag among the areas storing the hold information in the execution area AE and the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the confirmation processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  That is, in the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists in the areas where the hold information in the execution area AE and the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 is stored, step S3203 and the subsequent steps are performed. Even if there is pending information for which the confirmation process has not been executed, the confirmation process is not executed for the pending information. In the present modification, as in the third embodiment, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode as the success / failure lottery mode. Therefore, before the predetermined hold information becomes the start target of the game round, When a jackpot result is generated in the hold information, the result of the lottery determination for the predetermined hold information may be different. On the other hand, as described above, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists, the confirmation processing after step S3203 is not executed for the hold information to be the start target of the game after that. By doing so, when a jackpot result is generated, it becomes unnecessary to invalidate or re-confirm the confirmation processing result so far.

  In step S3203, “1” is set to the determined flag corresponding to the area that is the target of the current confirmation process among the execution area AE and the first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, if there are a plurality of areas in which the hold information is stored but the determined flag is not set to “1”, the areas from the upper side (execution area AE → first hold area RE1 →.・ ・）, The target of confirmation processing.

  In the subsequent step S3204, the jackpot determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information that is the execution target of the current confirmation process. In a succeeding step S3205, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, by referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning, In the case of the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning table for the high probability mode in step S3207. In this case, the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the low probability mode is more than the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the high probability mode. There are few types, and the former numerical information is not included in the latter numerical information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the former numerical information may be included in the latter numerical information.

  When the process of step S3206 is executed or when the process of step S3207 is executed, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not it corresponds to a big win. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 3208, “1” is set in step S 3209 to the jackpot flag corresponding to the area of the execution area AE and the first to fourth reserved areas RE 1 to RE 4 that is the target of the current confirmation process. "Is set. In subsequent step S3210, the type determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the hold information that is the execution target of the current confirmation process.

  In a succeeding step S3211, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to an opening / closing execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode. Note that the types of jackpot results are the same as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 53B). Therefore, in step S3211, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3211, in step S3212 the occurrence flag corresponding to the area that is the target of the current confirmation process among the execution area AE and the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 is set to “1”. "Is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3208, a confirmation process for outreach is executed in step S3213. In the confirmation process for outreach, whether the information for outlier reach determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 among the hold information subjected to the execution of the present confirmation process corresponds to the occurrence of outreach. Determine whether or not.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3211, when the process of step S3212 is executed, or when the process of step S3213 is executed, a pending command selection process is executed in step S3214. In the selection process, a hold command corresponding to the processing results of steps S3208 to S3213 is read from the main ROM 453. In step S3215, the read hold command is output to the sound emission control device 91, and then the confirmation process is terminated.

  However, in the processes in step S3214 and step S3215, when the hold information that is the target of the current confirmation process is the hold information stored in the execution area AE, the hold command is not selected and output. In other words, the hold information stored in the execution area AE can be set for the data of the determined flag, the jackpot flag, and the occurrence flag when it becomes a target of processing after step S3203, but the output of the hold command can be performed. Not an opportunity. On the other hand, regarding the first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4, when the processing of step S3203 and subsequent steps is performed, the data of the determined flag, the big hit flag, and the occurrence flag can be set, and the output of the hold command is performed. It can be an opportunity. Note that hold information that is not a jackpot result and is not a missed reach does not trigger the output of the hold command, but even the hold information may be configured to trigger the output of the hold command. In addition, the hold command includes information indicating in which of the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 the hold information that is the trigger for the output is stored.

  As described above, the main MPU 452 periodically executes the confirmation process for holding notice, and if there is holding information in which “1” is not set in the determined flag, it already corresponds to the jackpot result. On the condition that the held information does not exist, it is determined whether or not the held information corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, the type determination of the jackpot result is further performed. If the jackpot result is not supported, a confirmation process for outreach is executed. Then, a hold command corresponding to the result of the confirmation processing is output to the sound emission control device 91. Further, since the above confirmation process is executed for one piece of hold information for one execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28), the hold for which the determined flag is “0” is temporarily assumed. When there are a plurality of pieces of information, the confirmation process is completed for all of the hold information when the timer interrupt process for the same number of times as the number of the hold information is completed. However, since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 4 msec, the number of hold information whose determined flag is “0” is the maximum number of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage area 454b (specifically, Even if it is the same number as 5), the time required for the above confirmation processing for all of the hold information is equal to or shorter than the shortest duration of one game time. Furthermore, in each game time, a variable display of symbols is performed with a plurality of (for example, three) symbol sequences set in the symbol display device 61, and thereafter, a stationary display of symbols is performed in each symbol sequence. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the symbol is terminated. However, the time required for the confirmation process for all of the hold information is at least one symbol row after the game is started. It is less than the shortest time required for the symbol stop display to start.

  Even in this modified example, the remaining sphere handling process (FIG. 54) is executed as in the third embodiment. That is, in the situation where the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number (for example, “10”), the occurrence flag in any of the execution area AE and the first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4 is set. When “1” is set, a notice command is output from the main MPU 452 to the sound emission control device 91 as in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58, the hold notice process executed by the sound emission control device 91 will be described. The pending notice process is periodically executed in the sound emission control device 91 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  In step S3301, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, game effect production setting processing is executed in step S3302. In the setting process, information on the duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command, and information on the result of the game times determination process and the distribution determination process is specified from the contents of the type command. Then, an effect pattern for game times corresponding one-to-one with these identification results is identified. In this case, the effect pattern for the game times includes the contents of the presence / absence of execution of various effects and the contents of the types of effects determined to be executed. For example, the content of whether or not a reach effect is to be performed in the symbol display device 61 is included, and the content of the effect is included when the reach effect is performed. The reach production includes normal reach and super reach, and multiple types of production are set with different expectations of the jackpot result when the production occurs, and as a kind of reach production, the jackpot result and Premium effects that occur only when

  The sound emission control device 91 executes light emission control and sound output control in the current game round according to the contents of the effect set in the setting process in step S3302. In addition, the sound emission control device 91 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the setting process in step S3302 to the display control device 96. In the display control device 96, display control in the current game round is executed on the symbol display device 61 in accordance with the effect contents shown in the variation pattern command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3301, or after executing the process of step S3302, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not a pending notice command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, it is determined in step S3304 whether or not the pending notice command received this time is a command corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, and in step S3305 the pending received this time. It is determined whether the notice command is a command corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode. As a result, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, a pending notice lottery process corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode is executed in step S3306. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the process proceeds to step S3307. Thus, if the hold notice lottery process corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode is executed and a negative determination is made in both step S3304 and step S3305, the hold notice lottery process corresponding to the miss reach is executed in step S3308. To do.

  The hold notice means that the display corresponding to the contents of the hold information stored in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold storage area 454b is more than the game times triggered by the hold information. It is an effect performed at the previous timing. Specifically, an individual display area corresponding to the maximum number of reserved information (number of first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4) is set on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 as the effect. Of these individual display areas, the number of the hold information is clearly indicated by performing individual display in the number of the individual display areas corresponding to the number of the hold information stored in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. In such a configuration, the individual display mode in the individual display area is set to the mode corresponding to the content of the hold information, so that the hold notice is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 59B and 59C). As an aspect of this hold notice, when executed, the first effect (golden individual display) that confirms that the hold information corresponding to the individual display becomes a jackpot result when the game information is started. The second effect (the probability of a jackpot result being less than 100%) is the second effect (red individual display) and the third effect (the green color is the next most likely to be a jackpot result) Individual display) and a fourth effect (blue individual display) with the lowest probability of a jackpot result are set. It should be noted that the types of effects of the hold notice are not limited to four types, but may be two types, three types, or five or more types.

  Here, when the hold information is newly acquired, the main MPU 452 outputs a hold acquisition command to the sound emission control device 91, and when the game time is newly started, the main MPU 452 performs the sound emission control of the hold digest command. Output to the device 91. The sound emission control device 91 increases the number of individual displays performed in the individual display area when a hold acquisition command is received in other processing of step S3312 described later. In this case, the mode of the individual display is basically the mode of the fourth effect, and is selected when any one of the first effect to the third effect is selected as the execution of the hold notice. Individual display is performed. In addition, when the hold information is newly acquired in the situation where there is no hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the hold command is output immediately after the hold acquisition command is output. In the case of increasing, the individual display is started in a manner corresponding to the result of the pending notice lottery process described later. In addition, the voice light emission control device 91 reduces the number of individual displays performed in the individual display area when a pending digest command is received in other processing in step S3312 described later. In this case, with respect to the individual display which is one of the first to third effects, the order of the hold information that is the start target of the game times is changed (that is, the hold information is on the higher side). The display position is changed as it is shifted. That is, when holding information is stored in the first holding area RE1, individual display is performed in the first individual display area, and when holding information is stored in the second holding area RE2, the second individual is displayed. When individual display is performed in the display area and the hold information is stored in the third hold area RE3, the individual display is performed in the third individual display area, and the hold information is stored in the fourth hold area RE4. In this case, the individual display is performed in the fourth individual display area, and the first to fourth individual display areas are the first individual display area → the second individual display area → the third individual display area → the fourth individual display area. In the configuration in which the display areas are arranged in the horizontal direction in order, the hold information is displayed in the first to fourth individual display areas as the hold information is shifted in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. 1st stage to 3rd stage Individual display of any of the aspects of the is shifted to the higher side.

  Returning to the description of the hold notice process (FIG. 58), the hold notice lottery processes in steps S3306 to S3308 differ in the probability that the hold notice will be executed, and the probability of winning the execution is determined by the high-frequency winning mode. Is set so that the hold notice lottery process corresponding to is the highest and the hold notice lottery process corresponding to the miss reach is the lowest. Further, in each of the hold notice lottery processes, the types of effects that are easily selected when the hold notice is won are different. Specifically, in the pending notice lottery process corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, all of the first effect to the fourth effect are selected, but the selection probability so that the probability of selecting the first effect is the highest. Is set. Further, in the pending notice lottery process corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, all of the second effect to the fourth effect are selected, but the selection probability is set so that the probability of selecting the second effect is the highest. ing. Further, in the pending notice lottery process corresponding to the miss reach, the second effect to the fourth effect are selected, but the selection probability is set so that the probability that the fourth effect is selected is the highest.

  After executing any one of steps S3306 to S3308, in step S3309, a hold notice effect setting process is executed. In the setting process, a hold notice command corresponding to the effect content set in any of steps S3306 to S3308 is output to the display control device 96. In addition, the command includes information indicating in which of the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 the hold information that is the trigger for the output. As a result, the hold notice is started in the individual display area corresponding to the area where the hold information that triggered the output of the hold notice command is stored. However, when the fourth effect is selected as the mode of the hold notice, the individual display is performed in the same mode as the mode in which the individual display is simply increased in response to the reception of the hold acquisition command.

  Here, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the individual display in the individual display area is once erased (that is, the individual display area is erased) regardless of whether the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode is selected. The display of the individual display area is resumed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In this case, in the confirmation process for reservation notice in the main MPU 452 (FIG. 57), as already described, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists, On the other hand, after the opening / closing execution mode for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is completed without executing the check process after step S3203, the check process after step S3203 is executed for the unchecked hold information. In this configuration, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the time until the display of the individual display area is resumed is the maximum number (specifically five) of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage area 454b. Thus, the confirmation processing after step S3203 is executed, and for all of them, the time required to complete the setting of the hold notice in the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 96 is set. Therefore, when resuming the display of the individual display area, the display is resumed in a state that takes into account the content of the pending notice.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3303, or after the processing of step S3309 is executed, it is determined in step S3310 whether a hit notice command has been received. If the winning notice command has not been received, the remaining notice process is terminated after other processes are executed in step S3312. If a win advance notice command has been received, an effect content change process is executed in step S3311, and after other processes are executed in step S3312, the hold notice process ends.

  The effect content changing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the hit notice command received this time corresponds to the hold information stored in any of the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, the first change process is executed in step S3402, and then the effect content change process ends.

  In the first change process, as shown in FIG. 59 (b-1) and FIG. 59 (b-2), it corresponds to the hold information that is displayed in the individual display area and becomes the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode. The mode of the individual display is changed to the first effect having the highest expectation level resulting in the jackpot result. 59 (b-1) and 59 (b-2), specifically, in the situation where the individual display is performed in the second presentation mode in the second individual display area, the individual display mode is changed. It changes to the aspect of the 1st production. In addition, when it is already a 1st production, the state is maintained. As a result, the player grasps that the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs at an early timing, and therefore can promptly prompt the player to replenish the remaining ball information. Moreover, since the change of the mode of the individual display is performed regardless of the increase timing or the decrease timing of the individual display, it is unexpected for the player and the degree of attention is increased. Furthermore, as the display mode for prompting the replenishment of the remaining sphere information is also used as the effect mode of the hold notice, not only the data amount is reduced, but also the replenishment of the remaining sphere information as a part of the performance Can be encouraged. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the change of the mode of an individual display based on reception of a hit notice command is performed at the increase timing or the decrease timing of an individual display.

  Returning to the description of the effect content changing process (FIG. 59A), if a negative determination is made in step S3401, that is, the hit notice command received this time corresponds to the hold information stored in the execution area AE. In this case, after the second change process is executed in step S3403, the effect content change process is terminated.

  In the second change process, during the game turn that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, an effect is executed that enables the player to be urged to supplement the remaining ball information. Thus, the process for partially changing the production pattern already determined as the production during the game is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (c-1), although the execution of the premium effect is not selected for the variation pattern determined when the game turn is started, FIG. 59 (c) As shown in -2), a premium effect is executed. Thereby, the player can prompt the player to replenish the remaining ball information in order to grasp that the player enters the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode after the game round is completed. Become. In addition, since the premium effect is also used as a display mode for prompting the supplementation of the remaining ball information, not only the data amount is reduced, but also the player is prompted to supplement the remaining ball information as part of the effect. Is possible.

  Here, the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the hit announcement command is executed in the executable period that is originally set as the executable period of the premium effect that is the execution target. For example, if a premium effect that is executed during reach display is used, even if the hit notice command is received at a timing before the reach display is started, the premium effect is performed after the start of reach display. The premium effect is executed within the range of the executable period set in advance. However, the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the hit notice command is executed within a range in which the duration of the game times determined at the start of the corresponding game times is not changed. Therefore, when a premium effect includes a moving image effect executed over a predetermined time and an additional effect by causing a predetermined character to appear while another moving image effect is being executed. In this case, the additional effect is selected as the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the hit notice command. By selecting the additional effect in this way, the degree of freedom is increased with respect to the execution timing of the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the winning notice command. If the duration of the game times determined at the start of the game times is not changed, the moving image effect may be selected as a premium effect that is executed based on reception of the winning notice command.

  In addition, as premium effects that can be executed based on the reception of the hit announcement command, there are executable periods during game play, such as before reach display, after reach display, and after the start of stop display of symbols in all symbol sequences. When there is a different premium effect, the premium notice is included in the executable period, or the executable period exists after the reception timing. It is preferable that the premium effect in which the executable period closest to the performed timing is set is selected as the execution target. Thereby, it becomes possible to promptly replenish the remaining sphere information. In this case, when there are a plurality of premium effects in which an executable period exists at or after the reception timing of the winning notice command, each premium effect may be executed. Thereby, the opportunity for the player to confirm the premium effect is increased, and the opportunity for prompting the supplement of the remaining ball information is increased.

  In addition, although the hit announcement command can be output from the main MPU 452 even during the opening / closing execution mode, in this case, the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 96 do not execute any processing corresponding thereto. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and notification that prompts the replenishment of the remaining sphere information may be performed as in the first embodiment.

  Further, the hold information stored in the execution area AE may be configured not to be the output target of the hit notice command.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the 1st effect is not set as an effect of a hold notice. In this case, as an effect mode of the hold notice, there is no configuration in which there is no effect that is determined to be a jackpot result. In this configuration, in order to prompt the replenishment of the remaining ball information using the effect of the hold notice, when the hit notice command is received, the sound emission control device 91 causes the jackpot result among the effect forms of the hold notice. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure which changes the production | presentation aspect of a reservation notice to the aspect with the highest expectation degree.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the premium effect is not set as the effect for game times. In this case, as an effect mode for the game times, there is a configuration in which there is no effect that is determined to be a jackpot result. In this configuration, in order to encourage the supplementation of the remaining ball information using the effect for the game times, the voice light emission control device 91 is an effect mode for the game times when the winning notice command is received. It is good also as a structure that the production | presentation aspect with the highest expectation degree which becomes a jackpot result is performed among the production | presentation aspects executable with respect to reception of the winning notification command.

  Regardless of whether or not there is an effect that confirms that the jackpot result will exist as an effect for the hold notice or an effect for the game times, the remaining ball is used by using the effect of the hold notice or the effect for the game times. In a case where information supplementation is urged, a configuration in which an aspect with a high expectation level resulting in a jackpot result may be selected.

  Also, in the sound emission control device 91, instead of a configuration that executes an effect that has the highest expectation level that results in a jackpot result when receiving a hit announcement command, the expectation level that results in a jackpot result over the already determined effect content It is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of a high side. Even in this case, it is possible to prompt the supplement of the remaining sphere information.

  Further, in the sound emission control device 91, as the contents of the effect to be executed when the winning notice command is received, the effect type is determined as the jackpot result for the effect type that has already been determined to be executed by lottery. It is good also as a structure which makes it the aspect which becomes fixed, or makes it the aspect of the side with the high expectation degree which becomes a jackpot result. In this case, for example, in the case where execution of a production type for displaying a predetermined character (such as a school of fish) has been decided, a lottery result with a blue color as a base color of the predetermined character is obtained. The structure which changes to the red which is the side with the high expectation degree to become, and the structure which changes to the gold color which is determined to be a jackpot result. Moreover, instead of the said structure, while performing the effect type different from the effect type already determined by lottery as the content of the effect performed when the hit notice command is received, It is good also as a structure which makes an aspect into the aspect which determines that it will be a jackpot result, or the aspect of the side with the high expectation level which becomes a jackpot result. In this case, for example, when execution of an effect type for displaying a specific character (such as bubbles) is determined, the effect type is changed to an effect type for displaying a predetermined character (such as a school of fish) instead of the specific character. A configuration is mentioned.

  Further, when the first effect is executed as an effect of the holding notice in order to promote the supplementation of the remaining ball information, the first effect is obtained only by the individual display corresponding to the hold information that becomes a trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode. In addition to the change of the content of the individual display corresponding to the hold information, the first effect is also executed in the individual display of other hold information, or the other display of the hold information other than that It is good also as a structure which changes the aspect of the above to the content of the side with higher expectation than the aspect until then. However, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize when there is a possibility of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, individual display of hold information that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the individual display of the hold information that is later in the digestion order is changed.

  In addition, when notifying that the remaining ball information should be replenished, as an effect during the game times executed before the game times for the hold information that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode Although it is not an effect that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is confirmed, an effect with a high expectation degree of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode may be executed. In this case, it is good also as a structure where the production with the high expectation degree is continuously executed in each game time prior to the game time for the hold information that becomes the transition opportunity, each of these game times and the corresponding game times. It is good also as a structure by which the production with the said high expectation degree is continuously performed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure adjusted so that an effect performed continuously may have a high expectation degree, so that the game times of the order of the back may be continuous.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) The configuration may be such that the supply of the launch ball to the ball supply device 47 is performed from the outside of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a storage facility in which the launch ball is stored in the island facility of the game hall may be provided, and the launch ball may be supplied to the ball supply device 47 from the storage facility. And it is good also as a structure by which the launching ball discharged toward game area PA and discharged | emitted from the said game area PA is collect | recovered by storage equipment again. In this case, by providing the storage facility separately from the facility for replenishing the intake ball to the tank 121, it becomes possible to make the intake ball and the launch ball completely different from each other, as in the first embodiment. In addition, it is possible to prevent the illegal ball thrown into the upper plate 33 from being used as a launch ball.

  In this configuration, the position where the firing solenoid 48 is provided may be below the game area PA as in the first embodiment, or may be the upper left of the game area PA as in the second embodiment. Good. In this case, what is necessary is just to set the supply location of the launch ball from the storage facility according to the position where the launch solenoid 48 is provided.

  (2) Although the taking-in ball taken in from the upper plate 33 is not immediately used as a launching ball, it may be used as a launching ball thereafter. For example, a guide passage portion that guides the take-in ball taken in by the ball feeding device 131 toward the ball supply device 47 is provided, and the passage length of the guide passage portion is set to a passage length in which a plurality of take-in balls can wait. Set. In this case, when one captured ball is captured, the captured ball captured before the captured ball is supplied onto the firing rail 46 by the ball supply device 47 as a fired ball. In this configuration, the take-in ball is used as a launch ball, but it is possible to delay the timing when it is used as a launch ball. In addition, since the launching passage is replenished in the guidance passage portion at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10 or when the game hall is opened, one or more firing balls are always waiting in the guidance passage portion.

  (3) A supply detection sensor is provided on the launch rail 46 to detect that the launch ball is supplied from the ball supply device 47, and directly detects whether or not the launch ball is supplied from the ball supply device 47. It is good also as a structure. In this case, when the captured ball is detected by the ball feed detection sensor 142 and the fired ball is not detected by the supply detection sensor, data indicating that the captured ball has been detected is displayed. An abnormality notification may be executed while being stored and held in the internal RAM of the launch control unit 179, or a process for stopping the progress of the game in addition to the abnormality notification may be executed. Specifically, a time longer than the longest time assumed as a time required for the launch ball to be supplied onto the launch rail 46 by the ball supply device 47 after the take-in ball is detected by the ball feed detection sensor 142. A configuration in which an abnormality notification or the like is executed when the ball feeding detection sensor 142 detects a captured ball has elapsed.

  When there is a possibility that a plurality of captured balls may be captured before the abnormality notification is executed, a counter for measuring the number of captured balls for which the supply of the launching balls has not been completed is provided in the internal RAM. It is preferable to use a configuration provided in the above. In this case, the possibility that the taking-in of the taking-in ball is invalidated is reduced.

  (4) In the first embodiment, when the launch cycle is reached, the taking-in of one take-in ball is started and the launch ball is fired based on that, and the next launch cycle is reached. Although it has been configured so that the taking-in of one take-in ball is started again and the launch ball is fired based on the start-up, instead of this, in the situation where the launch operation device 37 is performing a launch operation, Even if it is not, it is good also as a structure by which a taking-in ball is taken in continuously. In this case, a counter is provided for measuring the number of taken-in balls, and when the number of fire executions of 1 or more is stored in the counter, even if the firing operation of the firing operation device 37 is finished, The configuration may be such that the supply and launching of the launch ball is performed until the execution number reaches “0”. Even when the launch operation of the launch operation device 37 is completed, in order to launch the launch ball, the launch intensity is not determined according to the rotation amount of the handle portion, but an operation portion different from the handle portion is used. It is preferable that the firing strength is determined and the determined firing strength is maintained even when the handle portion is not operated. According to the above configuration, the launch operation to the launch operation device 37 may be continued until the number of balls to be fired is taken in, and the launch operation to the launch operation device 37 needs to be continued until the launch is completed. Therefore, the duration of the launch operation can be shortened.

  In addition, a player grasps the number of fired balls that have already been determined to be fired by providing a notifying unit that informs of the number of captured balls that have been taken in and not the number of fired balls to be fired. It becomes possible.

  (5) The launch ball is supplied on the launch rail 46 even when the take-in ball is not taken in, and the take-in ball is fed by the launch operation device 37 as a trigger. The value of the counter for measuring the number of possible launches by being detected by the detection sensor 142 is incremented by 1 and when the number of possible launches is 1 or more, the firing solenoid 48 is driven so that the fired ball enters the game area PA. It is good also as a structure fired toward. In this case, it is possible to shorten the time from when the launch operation to the launch operation device 37 is started until the launch ball is actually launched.

  (6) It is good also as a structure by which the ball feed detection sensor 142 is provided so that the taking-in ball | bowl led out to the ball feeder 131 from the upper plate 33 may be detected. In this case, the ball feed detection sensor 142 is provided on the front door frame 14.

  (7) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the firing solenoid 48 is provided on the left side of the intake / discharge passage portion 141. For example, the configuration in which the launch solenoid 48 is provided above the intake / discharge passage portion 141 is provided. Also good.

  (8) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the take-in ball is soft iron and the launch ball is brass, and the launch ball may be formed of another metal that is not attracted to the magnet, such as 300 series stainless steel, It may be formed of ceramic.

  (9) Although the capture sphere and the launch sphere are made of different materials, the capture sphere and the launch sphere may be made of the same material.

  (10) Although all of the ball supply device 47, the firing solenoid 48, and the ball feeding device 131 are controlled by the power source / fire control device 171, some of them are controlled by the main control device 81 and the payout control device 161. It is good also as a structure controlled by other control apparatuses. For example, the ball feeding device 131 may be controlled by the main control device 81 or the payout control device 161, and the ball supply device 47 and the firing solenoid 48 may be controlled by the power source / fire control device 171. Specifically, in such a configuration, when the power supply / firing control device 171 specifies that the firing operation is performed on the firing operation device 37, a corresponding condition satisfaction signal is used to control the control target of the ball feeding device 131. The control device to be controlled operates the ball feeding device 131. And when the signal corresponding to having detected the taking-in ball | bowl from the ball | bowl feed detection sensor 142 in the said control target control apparatus is received, the signal corresponding to the power supply / launch control apparatus 171 from the said control target control apparatus. Send. By receiving the signal, the power supply / launch control device 171 operates the ball supply device 47 to supply the fired ball and operates the firing solenoid 48 to fire the fired ball toward the game area PA.

  (11) The take-in ball paid out from the payout device 124 may be supplied to the lower plate 34 without being supplied to the upper plate 33. In addition, in a configuration in which the ball storage box or the lower plate 34 disposed below the lower plate 34 is not provided, the intake ball may be supplied to the ball storage box disposed instead of the lower plate 34. .

  (12) If the payout device 124 is not provided in the pachinko machine 10 and a winning corresponding to the payout of the take-in ball occurs, the payout mechanism provided in the island facility of the game hall is taken into the pachinko machine 10. It is good also as a structure where a ball is paid out. In this case, the pay-in ball to be paid out may be paid directly to the upper plate 33, or may be paid to the lower plate 34 without being paid to the upper plate 33. In addition, in a configuration in which the ball storage box or the lower plate 34 disposed below the lower plate 34 is not provided, the intake ball may be supplied to the ball storage box disposed instead of the lower plate 34. .

  (13) The intake / discharge passage portion 141 and the ball feed detection sensor 142 may be provided in the front door frame 14 instead of the main body frame 13, and the intake / discharge passage portion 141 is provided in the front door frame 14. The ball feed detection sensor 142 may be provided in the main body frame 13, the ball feed detection sensor 142 is provided in the front door frame 14, and the intake / discharge passage portion 141 is provided in the main body frame 13. It is good also as composition which has.

  (14) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 81 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 96 is controlled by the sound emission control device 91 based on a command output from the main control device 81 The device 96 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 96 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 81, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 81. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 91 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 96 are also arbitrary.

  (15) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a launch ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a launch ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  (16) When attention is paid to the fact that the use of the launch ball having the IC tag 481 facilitates monitoring of the launch ball, the launch ball is discharged from the game area PA by flowing down the game area PA. The fired ball may be used for a configuration in which it is discharged from the pachinko machine 310. In addition, as a gaming medium of a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are integrated, one having an IC tag 481 may be used. For example, in the case of a slot machine, an IC tag 481 is attached to a medal, and ID information is read by the reader device 385 when it is detected that a medal is present in a predetermined area on the passage route that continues from the medal slot. In addition, when the ID information cannot be read or when the unregistered ID information is read, the abnormal process is executed. In this case, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the inserted game medium is legitimate.

  (17) In the third embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the ID information can be output by the IC tag 481, the ID information is provided by adding a barcode or QR code (registered trademark) to the surface of the launch ball. It is good also as a structure which enables output. In this case, whether or not the launch ball circulating in the pachinko machine 310 is legitimate by the manager of the game hall reading ID information using a bar code or QR code reader. Can be grasped.

  (18) Ceramic may be used in place of metal as the weight piece 484 for increasing the weight of the launch ball. In this case, by selecting a material that transmits radio waves as the ceramic, it is possible to increase the weight of the launch ball while facilitating communication with the IC tag 481.

  Further, instead of the resin material, a ceramic that can transmit radio waves may be used as the base material of the launch ball. In this case, a weight piece having a weight per unit volume larger than that of the base material may be provided on the firing ball, or may not be provided.

  (19) In the third embodiment, the ID information of a specific number of fired balls circulating in one pachinko machine 10 may be all in common. Even in this case, it is preferable to execute the abnormality process when there is a launch ball that cannot receive the ID information, and the abnormality process is executed when ID information different from the common ID information is received. It is preferable. In this case, when an irregular game ball is inserted, it is possible to cope with it.

  (20) In a configuration in which a specific number of shot balls have different ID information, the ID information may not be registered in the pachinko machine 310. Even in this case, it is possible to monitor the introduction of an irregular gaming ball by monitoring whether or not there is a firing ball that cannot receive the ID information. In addition, by grasping the number of types of ID information received within the monitoring period, it is possible to monitor the number of fired balls circulating in the pachinko machine 310.

  (21) ID information is input to the pachinko machine 310 by an external operation instead of the configuration for registering the ID information by reading the ID information from the launch ball moving in the pachinko machine 310 by the reader device 385. Thus, the ID information may be registered. For example, when a terminal unit for inputting data is provided in the pachinko machine 310 and a specific number of fire balls are set in the pachinko machine 310, ID information corresponding to the specific number of fire balls is written through the terminal unit. Configuration is conceivable.

  (22) When the first ID abnormality is identified and when the second ID abnormality is identified, before the launch ball that is the identification target is launched toward the game area PA, A configuration may be adopted in which launching of the launch ball is prohibited.

  (23) A configuration in which a part of the remaining ball information can be returned even in a situation where the launch operation device 336 is being operated may be employed. In this case, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom with respect to the operation timing for exchanging merchandise. However, in this configuration, a part return operation and a game ball launch operation can be performed at the same time, so in fact, even though the remaining ball information is already “0”, either There is a risk that the operation may be determined to be effective. Therefore, when the remaining ball information is more than a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) than the number of game balls specified by the operation for partial return, even if the launch operation is being performed, it is for partial return. It is preferable to adopt a configuration that enables the above operations.

  (24) In the third embodiment, when a partial return operation is performed, the storage medium M is not ejected, but is set by the player as in the fourth embodiment. The remaining ball information may be output to the hall computer of the game hall.

  (25) On hold information corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, as a target for which special notification is executed when the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number It is good also as a structure including the case where the game time of this is performed and the case where the said hold information is hold-stored. That is, when the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number, the special notification is executed before the result is displayed in the game information of the hold information that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure to be.

  (26) If the frequency information is 1 or more and the remaining sphere information is less than the reference number, a special notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to prompt the player to convert the frequency information into the remaining ball information before the opening / closing execution mode is started.

  (27) The special notification that allows the player to recognize that the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number may be executed only in the game times that trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the timing at which the special notification is started may be a timing before the symbol display on the symbol display device 61 is started, or may be a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows. Of course, only a part of the symbol sequence may be displayed in a variable manner. However, in maintaining the degree of attention to the game through the prediction of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode will occur, at the timing after the reach variation display is started and before the reach variation display is accommodated. A configuration in which special notification is executed as a kind of the reach effect or separately from the reach effect is preferable.

  Moreover, in the structure in which the premium effect that is executed only when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs is set as the effect in the symbol display device 61, the premium effect may be executed as a special notification. In this case, it is not necessary to prepare image data dedicated to special notification, and it is possible to provide special notification as an effect to the player.

  (28) Instead of the configuration in which the storage and update of the frequency information are executed by the payout side RAM 464 and the payout side MPU 462, the main side RAM 454 and the main side MPU 452 may be executed. It is good also as a structure performed by MPU472. Further, the cash-in slot 432, the medium slot 433, and the medium outlet 434 of the management unit 431 may be provided in the main body base 321 or the front door 322, and the payout control board 461 may fulfill the function of the management control board 471.

  (29) In the main processing (FIG. 25) at the time of power-on of the main MPU 452, the second erase button is at least one of when the power failure flag is not set to “1” and when the checksum is abnormal Even if 361c is not operated, an initialization command may be output to the payout MPU 462.

  (30) The payout side MPU 462 also sets “1” to the power failure flag when the power is shut off, and the checksum is calculated and stored. In the main process (FIG. 26) at the time of power activation, the power failure flag is set. It is also possible to determine whether or not “1” is set and whether or not the checksum is normal. In this case, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” in the main process, or if the checksum is abnormal, the payout MPU 462 may be used even if the initialization command is not received from the main MPU 452. , The payout side RAM 464 is initialized.

  (31) In the third embodiment, when a prize is generated with the front door 322 being opened, a configuration may be set in an abnormal state in which abnormality notification or the like is executed. In this case, it is possible to cope with an act of bringing a game ball to any of the entrances and directly entering it.

  (32) The pachinko machine 310 may output the frequency information and the remaining ball information to an external device other than the management unit 431 and provided in a game hall or the like. In this case, as an electrical connection point between the external device and the pachinko machine 310, a connection point with the management unit 431 may be used, or a dedicated connection point may be provided. With this configuration, even when a connection failure with the management unit 431 or a failure of the management unit 431 occurs, it is possible to eject the storage medium M in which the frequency information and the remaining sphere information are written. .

  (33) The area above the lower end of the window panel 352 and the game board 51 in the front door 322 may be configured to be integrally removable. In this case, since only the unit needs to be replaced when changing the model, the replacement work can be facilitated.

  (34) The management unit 431 may be provided with a reader device that can receive cash information from a general-purpose storage medium.

  (35) The first erasing button 361b and the second erasing button 361c are not provided in the main control device 361, but instead of the game board 51, such as the payout control device 364 and the firing control device 365, the support base body 331. It is good also as a structure provided in the apparatus mounted in.

  (36) Data on the payout rate of game balls with respect to the number of shot balls in the normal game state is stored in advance in the pachinko machine 310, and the payout rate actually measured in the normal game state is higher than the base payout rate. If it is high, processing such as abnormality notification or stop of progress of the game may be executed. In this case, since the payout rate changes depending on the adjustment of the nail 59 in the game area PA, it is preferable that the base payout rate can be adjusted in the game hall.

  (37) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which two power supply devices are provided, and may have a configuration in which only one power supply device is provided, and another power supply device is provided for the management unit 431. It is good also as composition which has.

  In a configuration in which only one power supply device is provided, power is supplied from one power supply device to all of the various devices including the main control device 361, the payout control device 364, and the management unit 431. In this case, the power supply device may be mounted on the back surface of the game board 51 or may be mounted on the back surface of the support base body 331.

  In addition, power is supplied from one power supply device to various devices provided in the pachinko machine 310 including the main control device 361 and the payout control device 364, while the management unit 431 has a different route from the power supply device. In the configuration in which power is supplied, a power supply device that supplies power to the management unit 431 may be provided in the pachinko machine 310, may be provided in the management unit 431, It is good also as a structure by which electric power is supplied from the power supply device for supplying electric power to a hall computer.

  (38) When an abnormality is detected in the main MPU 452, a command to that effect may be output to the payout MPU 462 so that the game ball is prohibited from being emitted.

  (39) The first to sixth embodiments may be combined with each other. For example, the configuration described in the fourth embodiment and the configuration described in the sixth embodiment may be employed, and the configuration described in the fifth embodiment and the configuration described in the sixth embodiment. It is good also as a structure which has.

  (40) In the third embodiment, the collision member such as the nail 59 that regulates the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA adjusts the flow direction of the game ball and the winning frequency with the front door 322 opened. It is good also as a structure provided so that it may not be necessary to adjust.

  For example, if the nail 59 provided in the game area PA is made of synthetic resin, ceramic, or hard metal, an external force is applied to the nail 59 to adjust the angle or shape of the nail 59. It may be configured to be impossible or difficult to perform. According to this configuration, even if the front door 322 is opened, the adjustment in the flow direction and the adjustment of the winning frequency are impossible or difficult to perform, so the adjustment act is substantially not performed and the front door 322 is opened. Occurrence of the event that the game ball spills down at this time is suppressed.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can provide a drive means with respect to each collision member, such as the nail 59, or a predetermined combination unit, and can adjust the angle and shape of a collision member by electric drive. In this case, since it is possible to adjust the flow direction and the winning frequency without opening the front door 322, the possibility that the front door 322 will be opened at the time of the adjustment is low. Occurrence of an event that the game ball spills down when the front door 322 is opened is suppressed.

  (41) In order to prevent the illegal use of a smaller illegal ball than the regular game ball, a ball smaller than the regular game ball can pass through the circulation path of the game ball, and the regular game ball cannot pass. An opening may be formed. In this case, since the small illegal sphere is excluded from the circulation path through the opening, it is suppressed that the illegal sphere continues to circulate. In addition, an illegal sphere detection sensor may be provided to detect a sphere that has passed through the opening. In this case, it is possible to specify in the pachinko machine 310 that there was a small illegal ball, and for example, it is possible to execute processing such as notification in the pachinko machine 310 itself or external output to the hall computer of the game hall. .

  (42) In order to prevent the illegal use of a larger illegal ball than the regular game ball, an opening through which the ball larger than the regular game ball cannot pass may be formed in the circulation path of the game ball. As a result, when a large illegal ball is thrown into the pachinko machine 310, the ball is clogged at the opening, and it becomes impossible to continue the game, thereby preventing the circulation of the large illegal ball. Is possible. In addition, an illegal sphere detection sensor may be provided to detect a sphere staying in the opening. In this case, it is possible to specify in the pachinko machine 310 that a large illegal ball was present, and for example, it is possible to execute processing such as notification in the pachinko machine 310 itself or external output to the hall computer of the game hall. .

  (43) The outer frame 311 may be common to all manufacturers of the pachinko machine 310. In this case, the outer frame 311 may not be included in the pachinko machine 310 but may be deferred to the island facility, or the pachinko machine 310 may be included.

  Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration, the management unit 431 may be configured to be common among all manufacturers of the pachinko machine 310. In this case, the management unit 431 may not be included in the pachinko machine 310 but may be installed on the island facility, or the pachinko machine 310 may be included. Even if the management unit 431 is configured to be deferred on the island facility, the management unit 431 may be configured to be supplied with operating power from the pachinko machine 310, and supplied with operating power from the game hall side. It is good also as a structure.

  Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration, the support base body 331 (excluding the game board 51) may be configured to be common among all manufacturers of the pachinko machine 310. In this case, the support base body 331 may not be included in the pachinko machine 310 but may be placed on the island facility, or the pachinko machine 310 may be included. Further, in this configuration, since the combination of the front door 322 and the game board 51 is a different part among manufacturers, these integrated objects are supported by the support base body 331 while the game board 51 is locked to the front door 322. It is good also as a structure which can be mounted in.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which replaces with said each structure and is common among all the manufacturers except the game board 51. FIG. In this case, other than the game board 51 may be deferred to the island facility.

  (44) In the third embodiment, the device for detecting the launch ball supplied on the launch rail 212 is limited to a configuration in which both the launch ball detection sensor 384 and the reader device 385 are provided. It is good also as a structure in which only any one is provided. For example, the configuration may be such that the firing ball detection sensor 384 is not provided and the reader device 385 is provided. Even in this case, based on the reading result in the reader device 385, it is possible to measure the number of fired balls that have been launched or have been launched.

  (45) The configuration of the control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 310 is arbitrary as long as each function can be secured. For example, the control of the operation unit 441 may be performed by the management control board 471 instead of the payout control board 461. In addition, a part or all of the functions of the management unit 431 may be included in the main control board 451 or may be included in the payout control board 461.

  (46) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the medium input port 433 and the medium discharge port 434 are both provided in the management unit 431. Both the input and output of the storage medium M are performed in one medium opening. It is good also as composition which is performed.

  Further, the storage medium M is not limited to a configuration in which a general-purpose medium is used, and a configuration in which a medium dedicated to each person such as a membership card may be used. In this case, each of the game hall customers will have the dedicated medium, and data on the number of unused game balls and unused amount of data will be written on the medium, and if it is used, it will be managed. Data is rewritten in the unit 431 or the like. Further, in a configuration in which a dedicated medium is used as described above, a configuration in which both loading and unloading of a medium are performed through one medium opening provided in the management unit 431 may be adopted. In addition, in this configuration, when exchanging with drinks or cigarettes using remaining ball information, the above-mentioned dedicated medium in which the remaining ball information used for exchange or product information to be exchanged is written is managed. It is good also as composition discharged from unit 431.

  In addition, in the configuration in which a dedicated medium is used as described above, when the remaining sphere information is used to exchange for drinks or cigarettes, the remaining sphere information is written or the product information to be exchanged is The written general-purpose medium may be ejected. In this case, the management unit 431 preferably has a configuration in which an opening for using a dedicated medium and an opening for using a general-purpose medium are separately provided as the opening for the medium. For example, a configuration in which one opening for both loading and discharging of a dedicated medium and one opening for both loading and discharging of a general-purpose medium is preferable.

  (47) The payout side MPU 462 measures the monitoring time at the time of power outage after receiving the power outage command from the main side MPU 452 after receiving the power outage signal from the second power outage monitoring board 465. In such a situation, another command such as a prize ball command received from the main MPU 452 may be stored and held. In this case, in a configuration in which a power failure signal is output from different power failure monitoring boards 455 and 465 to the main side MPU 452 and the payout side MPU 462, it becomes possible to suitably manage prize balls.

  (48) In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the position of the game ball launching mechanism 211 is not limited to the upper left of the game area PA, but the upper center portion in the lateral center of the game area PA. Or may be at the upper right of the game area PA, may be above the upper end of the upper plate 33, and may be below the center in the vertical direction of the game area PA. It may be the center of the direction.

  (49) In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the launch rail 212 is configured such that the top surface thereof is horizontal, but the top surface is inclined downward toward the launch source side. It is good also as a structure provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the launch ball supplied on the launch rail 212 from rolling toward the game area PA due to its own weight. In this configuration, it is preferable to provide a holding member that holds the firing ball in order to prevent the firing ball supplied on the firing rail 212 from rolling on the firing solenoid 214 side by its own weight.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

Features 1. Launching means (launch rail 46 and launch solenoid 48 in the first embodiment, launch rail 212 and launch solenoid 214 in the second embodiment) for launching a launch ball toward the game area (game area PA);
A ball-entry unit (general winning port 52, special electric winning device 53, first operating port 54, second operating port 55) in which a launch ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Privilege granting means (payout device 124, payout control device 161) for granting a privilege to the player based on the launch ball entering the pitching portion;
A sphere storage unit (upper plate 33) for storing a sphere;
Taking-in means (ball feeding device 131) for taking in the sphere stored in the sphere storage unit;
A launch control means (a launch control circuit 176) that enables a launch ball to be launched by the launch means when a ball is taken in by the take-in means;
With
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the launch control means makes the possible state and the launch means launches a fire ball, the fire ball different from the ball that triggered the possible state is fired.

  According to the feature 1, since it is prevented that the sphere taken in from the sphere storage unit is used as it is as the launch sphere, the illegitimate sphere smaller than the regular game sphere, Even if a fraudulent attempt is made to fire the game storage area by replenishing the ball storage portion with a stringed illegal ball or the like, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a profit. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the act of illegally generating a ball entering the ball entry unit.

  Feature 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the ball storage unit allows a player to replenish the ball storage unit with the ball.

  According to the feature 2, since the player can replenish the ball to the ball storage unit, even if the ball and the launch ball have different configurations, the game is played in the same sense as an existing game machine. It becomes possible.

  Feature 3. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when a privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, a ball corresponding to the grant is paid out to the ball storage unit.

  According to the feature 3, when a ball enters the ball entrance part, the ball is paid out to the ball storage part. Therefore, even if the ball and the launch ball are different, the same feeling as that of the existing game machine. A game can be performed.

  Feature 4. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the ball taken in by the take-in means is not used as a launch target of the launch means.

  According to the feature 4, it is possible to prevent the illegal ball as described above from being launched toward the game area.

  Feature 5. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of features 1 to 4, wherein the ball taken in by the taking-in means is discharged outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature 5, even when the illegal sphere as described above is supplemented to the sphere storage unit, it is possible to make the illegal sphere difficult to use in the gaming machine.

  Feature 6 Circulation means (a recovery passage forming body 151, a supply passage portion 152, a foul ball) that allows the launch ball discharged from the game area to be used as a launch target of the launch means without being discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features 1 to 5, further comprising a collection unit 154 and a transport device 155).

  According to the feature 6, since the launch ball circulates in the gaming machine, it is difficult to illegally throw the illegal ball into the gaming machine as the launch ball.

  Feature 7. The gaming machine according to any one of features 1 to 6, wherein the ball and the launch ball are made of different materials.

  According to the feature 7, it is possible to use a game ball appropriate for each of the ball and the launch ball. For example, using a game ball that is not attracted by a magnet as a launch ball, while using a game ball similar to an existing game machine so that the player does not feel uncomfortable, It is possible to prevent illegal acts.

Feature 8 Provided with a firing operation means (launching operation device 37) operated by a player,
Any one of the features 1 to 7, wherein the launch operation unit performs a launch operation so that the take-in unit captures a sphere, and the launch unit launches the launch ball. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature 8, even if the ball is not used as a launch ball as it is, the player only has to perform a launch operation on the launch operation means during the game, so that the operability is reduced as compared with existing game machines. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while avoiding this.

Feature 9 A take-in detecting means (ball feed detecting sensor 142) for detecting the sphere taken in by the take-in means or the taken-in sphere;
A ball supply means (a ball supply device 47 in the first embodiment, a ball supply device 213 in the second embodiment) for supplying a game ball to the launching means;
With
The launch control means controls the sphere supply means so that one launch ball is supplied to the launch means when one sphere is detected by the capture detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of features 1 to 8.

  According to the feature 9, in a configuration in which a sphere is not used as it is as a launching sphere, it is possible to appropriately supply one launching sphere with respect to taking in one sphere.

Feature 10 A base body (main body frame 13) comprising the launching means and the game area;
A front body (front door frame 14) provided on the base body so as to be openable and closable, including the ball storage section and the take-in means;
A lead-out passage portion (take-out discharge passage portion 141) for leading the sphere taken in by the take-in means toward a side different from the firing means side;
With
The intake detection means is provided to detect a sphere passing through the lead-out passage portion,
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the lead-out passage portion and the intake detection means are provided in the base body.

  According to the feature 10, it is possible to commonly use the game machine and the front body in which the sphere is used as a launch ball as it is, and it is possible to suitably manage the parts.

Feature 11. The game area is formed on a game board (game board 51),
The game board includes guidance means (inner rail portion 51a, outer rail portion 51b) for guiding the fired ball fired by the launching means to the upper part of the game area,
The take-in means is provided behind an inlet formed on one end side in the lateral direction of the ball reservoir,
The lead-out passage portion is formed to receive a ball taken in by the take-in means at a position behind the take-in means,
The gaming machine according to claim 10, wherein the launching means is provided closer to the entrance side of the guiding means than the lead-out passage portion.

  According to the feature 11, the ball taken in by the take-in means can be smoothly led out to the lead-out passage portion without changing the position of the take-in means provided on the front body from the existing gaming machine. Become.

Feature 12. The game area is formed on a game board (game board 51),
The game board includes guidance means (inner rail portion 51a, outer rail portion 51b) for guiding the fired ball fired by the launching means to the upper part of the game area,
The firing means includes
Firing execution means (launch solenoid 48) having an output shaft for projecting toward the launch ball to launch the launch ball toward the game area;
A launch rail (a launch rail 46) that holds a launch ball on the projecting tip side of the output shaft and guides the launch ball launched by the output shaft toward the entrance side of the guide means;
With
The launch execution means includes a mounting position of the launch execution means of another game machine in which the ball taken in by the take-in means is directly supplied onto the launch rail and the supplied ball is launched as a launch ball by the launch execution means. Any one of the features 1 to 11 is provided at a position that is coaxial with the launch execution unit of the other gaming machine and on the launch destination side of the launch execution unit of the other gaming machine. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature 12, it is possible to commonly use a gaming machine and a game board in which a ball is used as a launch ball as it is, and it is possible to perform component management appropriately.

  Feature 13. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the launching means is provided so as to launch a fired ball at a position above the upper end of the ball storage unit.

  According to the feature 13, it is possible to launch a shot ball at a position near the upper part of the game area, and it becomes easy to supply the shot ball to the upper part of the game area. Moreover, since it has a configuration of the above feature 1 and the sphere taken in from the sphere reservoir is not used as it is as a launch sphere, the launching means launches the launch sphere at a position above the upper end of the sphere reservoir. Even if it is the structure to perform, it becomes possible to supply the launching ball to the launching means smoothly.

  Feature 14. The ball storage section is provided at a position below the lower end of the game area, and the launching means is provided at a position above the lower end of the game area. 14. The gaming machine according to any one of 13.

  According to the feature 14, it becomes possible to launch a fired ball at a position near the upper part of the game area, and it becomes easy to supply the fired ball to the upper part of the game area. In addition, since the structure of the above feature 1 is provided and the sphere taken in from the sphere storage unit is not used as it is as a sphere, the launcher shoots the sphere at a position above the lower end of the game area. Even if it is a structure, it becomes possible to supply the launching ball to the launching means smoothly.

  Feature 15. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the launching means is provided so as to launch a firing ball at a position above a longitudinal center of the game area. .

  According to the feature 15, it becomes possible to fire a shot ball at a position near the upper part of the game area, and it becomes easy to supply the shot ball to the upper part of the game area. In addition, since the structure of the above feature 1 is provided and the sphere taken in from the sphere storage unit is not used as a sphere as it is, the launching means is located above the center in the vertical direction of the game area. Even if it is the structure which performs a launch, it becomes possible to supply a launch ball to the launching means smoothly.

Feature 16. A supply passage portion (supply passage portion for launch 215) for waiting for a plurality of launch balls to be supplied to the launch means;
16. The gaming machine according to any one of features 1 to 15, wherein it is possible to confirm whether or not a launch ball is present in the supply passage portion.

  If the launch ball is not waiting in the supply passage, even if the take-in means captures the ball, the launch means cannot launch the fire ball. On the other hand, according to the feature 16, since it is possible to confirm whether or not the launch ball is present in the supply passage portion, when such a situation occurs or when it occurs, it is early. It becomes possible to cope.

  Feature 17. 17. The gaming machine according to claim 16, wherein whether or not a launch ball is waiting in the supply passage portion can be visually recognized through a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature 17, it is possible to easily visually check whether or not the launch ball is waiting in the supply passage portion.

Feature 18. Standby detection means (standby detection sensor 216) for detecting whether or not a launch ball is waiting in the supply passage section;
Special processing execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S605 and step S606 in the main MPU 83) that executes special processing when a shot ball is not detected by the standby detection means;
A gaming machine according to the feature 16 or 17, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature 18, when the ball is not waiting in the supply passage portion, a special process is performed on the ball, so that it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to deal with it.

Feature 19. The special processing execution means is a state in which at least a part of the progress of the game is stopped as the special processing,
The gaming machine according to claim 18, wherein when the stop state is released, the game machine is configured to return to a state before being set to the stop state.

  According to the feature 19, even if the launch ball is not waiting in the supply passage portion, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the player receives.

  The invention of the above-described feature group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines are known as a kind of gaming machine. Specifically, the pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area in which game balls flow down is formed, and the game board is provided with a plurality of entrance parts into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. ing. When a game ball enters the ball entry part, a privilege such as payout of the game ball or execution of an internal lottery is given to the player. In addition, the game ball that has entered the entrance part is discharged to the back side of the game board. In addition, the game board is provided with a discharge unit for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the entry units to the outside of the game area.

  Here, in the pachinko machine such as the above-described example, an act of illegally generating a ball entering the ball-entry unit is assumed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. In gaming machines that use gaming media to play games,
The gaming machine (launching ball) has identification means (IC tag 481) capable of outputting identification information.

  According to the feature A1, it is possible to easily determine whether the gaming medium is legitimate by reading the identification information from the gaming medium used in the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to manage game media suitably.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the identification unit includes an antenna member (antenna member 483) that can transmit the identification information to a reception unit (reader device 385).

  According to the feature A2, the identification information can be easily read.

Feature A3. The identification means is provided so as not to exist on the peripheral surface of the game medium,
The game machine according to Feature A2, wherein the game medium is formed so that identification information of the identification means can be transmitted to the outside of the game medium.

  According to the feature A3, it is possible to facilitate the reading of the identification information while preventing a direct external force from being applied to the identification means when the game medium is used.

Feature A4. The identification means is entirely embedded in the game medium,
The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein at least a part of a region between the surface of the gaming medium and the identification unit is formed of a non-metallic material.

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to protect the identification means while allowing the identification information to be transmitted to the outside.

  Feature A5. The game medium is characterized in that weight pieces (weight pieces 484) having a larger weight per unit volume than the base portion are dispersedly arranged with respect to a base portion formed of the non-metallic material. A gaming machine according to Feature A4.

  When a game medium is formed using a non-metallic material, there is a concern that the game medium will be extremely light compared to a conventional metal game medium, but according to Feature A5, Since the game medium has a weight piece, it can have a certain weight. Further, since the weight pieces are arranged in a distributed manner, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while enabling transmission of identification information to the outside of the game medium.

Feature A6. Receiving means (reader device 385) for receiving the identification information from the game medium;
Using the identification information received by the receiving means, a monitoring process executing means for executing a monitoring process for the game medium (a function for executing an ID monitoring process in the payout side MPU 462);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, comprising:

  According to the feature A6, it is possible to monitor the game medium using the identification information in the gaming machine itself.

Feature A7. A presence detection means (launching ball detection sensor 384) for detecting that the game medium is present in a predetermined area;
The receiving means receives the identification information from the game medium detected by the presence detecting means as being present in the predetermined area;
The monitoring processing execution means determines whether the receiving means has received the identification information when the presence detecting means detects that the game medium is present in the predetermined area as the monitoring processing. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, characterized in that when the determination is made and the identification information is not received, a special process (step S2709) is executed.

  According to the feature A7, when an unauthorized gaming medium having no identification information is thrown into the gaming machine, it can be dealt with.

Feature A8. A storage unit (circulation storage tank 231) for storing the game medium;
Launching means (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game medium stored in the storage section toward the game area;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the predetermined area is present upstream of the gaming area with reference to the flow of the gaming medium from the storage portion toward the gaming area.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to grasp that the non-regular game medium exists at a timing before the game medium flows down the game area. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act using the non-regular game medium is performed, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from being given a profit.

Feature A9. A storage unit (circulation storage tank 231) for storing the game medium;
Launching means (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game medium stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Circulation means (collection passage part 232, transport device 233) for supplying the game medium discharged from the game area to the storage part without discharging to the outside of the gaming machine;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, comprising:

  According to the feature A9, since the game media is circulated in the game machine without being discharged from the game machine after use, the total number of game media required in the game hall can be suppressed. However, in such a configuration, when an irregular gaming medium is inserted into a gaming machine, the gaming medium circulates in the gaming machine, so that it is frequently used in the gaming machine. It will be. On the other hand, since the game medium is monitored using the identification information, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game medium is legitimate through the presence / absence of reception of the identification information.

  Feature A10. The monitoring process executing means monitors the number of game media circulating in the gaming machine using the reception result of the identification information in the receiving means as the monitoring process. The gaming machine according to Feature A9.

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to monitor the number of game media as well as monitoring whether or not an unauthorized game medium is inserted using the identification information.

  Feature A11. The receiving means is from the game medium existing in a predetermined area included in a passing area from the storage section to the game area, discharged from the game area and returned to the storage section by the circulation means, The gaming machine according to Feature A9 or A10, wherein the gaming machine receives identification information.

  According to the feature A11, it is possible to monitor the game medium using the identification information during a normal game in which the game medium is to be launched toward the game area.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, wherein the game media circulated using the circulation means have different identification information.

  According to the feature A12, since different identification information is set for each game medium, each game medium can be individually monitored. In particular, when the configuration of the feature A10 is provided and the number of game media is monitored, each game media can be individually recognized even in a situation where each game media is circulating in an irregular order. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the number of times of monitoring and the configuration for monitoring. For example, during normal games, game media will flow down the game area, so each game medium will circulate in an irregular order, but a configuration that uses individual identification information for monitoring Therefore, it is difficult to be affected by this irregularity during monitoring. Therefore, it is possible to monitor the number of game media even during a normal game.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, further comprising identification information storage means (ID information storage area 464d) for storing each identification information of the game medium circulated using the circulation means.

  According to feature A13, when the identification information is received by the receiving means, it is determined whether or not the received identification information is authentic by determining whether or not the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Can be grasped. As a result, even when an unauthorized gaming medium capable of transmitting the identification information is inserted, it is possible to cope with it.

  Feature A14. The game according to Feature A13, further comprising storage execution means (a function of executing ID acquisition processing in the payout MPU 462) for storing the identification information received by the reception means in the identification information storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature A14, since the identification information received by the receiving means provided in the gaming machine is stored in the identification information storage means, the gaming machine is used when the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. There is no need to input identification information or output identification information from the outside. Thereby, workability in the case of storing identification information is improved.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature A group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. These gaming machines are played using a predetermined game medium.

  For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, a game ball is used as a game medium. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the game ball launch mechanism based on the player's launch operation. Then, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the fired game ball enters the entrance portion provided in the game area.

  For example, in the case of a slot machine, medals are used as game media. When the start lever is operated after the player performs a medal insertion operation, the reel starts to rotate, and the reel stops rotating based on the stop button operation by the player. When the reel is stopped, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to the privilege is granted at a predetermined effective position visible from the front of the slot machine. Is done.

  In addition to pachinko machines and slot machines, there are also known game machines (hereinafter also referred to as “integrated game machines”) in which games similar to slot machines are played using game balls instead of medals as game media. .

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is preferable that management of game media to be used is appropriately performed.

  For example, in the case of a slot machine and the above-mentioned integrated gaming machine, a game is generally performed using a game medium lent out in a game hall, but a game medium that is not lent out in the game hall is used. An illegal act of playing a game is assumed.

  Further, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, an illegal act of playing a game using a game ball smaller than the game ball used in the game hall is assumed. In this case, because the non-regular game ball is smaller than the regular game ball, it is easy for a ball to enter the entrance, resulting in a disadvantage to the game hall. End up.

  In addition, in a so-called enclosed pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used in one pachinko machine, the non-regular game balls as described above continue to circulate in the pachinko machine. It is assumed that the frequency of fire will increase. If it does so, the disadvantage which a game hall suffers will become great. Furthermore, in the case of the enclosed pachinko machine, if the number of game balls circulating in the pachinko machine is extremely reduced, it is impossible to continue normal games.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. In gaming machines where games are played using game media,
The number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is configured so that the game media can be used in the game for the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 464b). Is updated by the updating means (function for executing return management processing in the payout side MPU 462, the operation unit 441 in the third embodiment, the operation panel unit 491 in the fourth embodiment),
The updating means includes
Subtraction number specifying means for specifying the number of game media to be subtracted for a purpose different from that of the game (in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing in step S2103 and the processing in step S2108 in the payout side MPU 462, and partial return) A ball information storage area 464c, a function of executing the process of step S3002 in the payout side MPU 462 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3107 in the payout side MPU 462 in the fifth embodiment),
The information in the possible number storage means is updated so as to be subtracted from the number of usable game media by the number of game media specified by the subtraction number specifying means, and stored in the possible number storage means at the time of the update. Subtraction execution means that enables subtraction of a number smaller than the usable number (the function of executing step S2114 in the payout MPU 462 in the third embodiment, the payout MPU 462 in the fourth embodiment) A function of executing the process of step S3005, a function of executing the process of step S3109 in the payout side MPU 462 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, since the information on the number of usable game media is stored in the possible number storage means, the actual game media can be substituted with the information on the number of game media. It is possible to reduce the total number of game media.

  In addition, when the information on the number of usable game media stored in the possible number storage means is used for purposes other than games such as exchange of goods in a game hall, only a few minutes according to the purpose of use are used. Can be used. As a result, when the actual game medium is used as information on the number of game media as described above, the information on the number of game media can be used for exchanging items in the game hall.

  As described above, the total number of game media in the game hall can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B2. A storage unit (circulation storage tank 231) for storing game media;
Launching means (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game medium stored in the storage section toward the game area;
Circulation means (collection passage portion 232, transport device 233) for supplying the game medium discharged from the game area to the storage unit without discharging it to the outside of the gaming machine;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, characterized in that the player is prevented from touching gaming media circulating in the gaming machine including the gaming media stored in the storage unit.

  According to the feature B2, even if the game medium flows down the game area, the game machine circulates in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to determine the number of game media used in the game machine, and accordingly, the game hall It is possible to suppress the total number of game media in.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot take out the game medium circulating in the gaming machine, the conventional exchange in the game hall in which the game medium is exchanged for a product such as a drink cannot be performed. End up. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature B1 is provided and information on the number of game media can be used for exchanging products in the game hall, the game media is circulated in the gaming machine. Even so, conventional exchanges in the game hall are possible.

  Feature B3. In the situation where the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is subtracted by the execution of the game, the update means suppresses the subtraction by the subtraction execution means (the process of step S2001 in the payout side MPU 462) The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, further comprising:

  According to the feature B3, the situation where the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is subtracted for the execution of the game and the situation where the information is subtracted for the exchange of goods etc. overlap. It is prevented. Thereby, it is suppressed that the update process of the information of possible number memory | storage means will be complicated. In addition, when the complexity is suppressed, priority is given to the use of information on the number of game media in the game, so that the progress of the game can be prioritized.

  The following configuration can be considered as a specific configuration when the configuration of the feature B3 is applied to a pachinko machine.

Firing operation means (launching operation device 336) operated by a player;
A launching unit (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game medium toward the game area based on the operation of the launching operation unit;
With
The said suppression means is a structure which suppresses the subtraction by the said subtraction execution means on the condition that the said firing operation means is operated at least one condition.

  Feature B4. The updating means outputs information on the number of game media specified by the subtraction number specifying means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2112 in the payout side MPU 462, and the management unit 431). In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, which includes a function of executing the process of step S3004 in the payout side MPU 462 and a management unit 431).

  According to the feature B4, since information on the number of game media to be subtracted is output, the information on the number of game media can be used for exchanging merchandise in the game hall.

  The following configuration can be considered as a specific configuration of the feature B4.

  The update means includes a medium discharge means (a function for executing the process of step S2112 in the payout side MPU 462, the management unit 431) for discharging the storage medium in which the information on the number of game media specified by the subtraction number specifying means is written. Configuration that has.

  Feature B5. When the updating means specifies that all the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means should be discharged, the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is deleted. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising: an erasing unit that performs (a function of executing the process of step S2012 in the payout side MPU 462).

  According to the feature B5, when the player finishes the game, the player discharges all the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means, and when exchanging goods in the game hall, the player stores in the possible number storage means. A part of the information on the number of stored game media can be discharged.

  Feature B6. The update means is provided so as to be operable by a player, and a subtraction operation means (in the third embodiment) that allows an instruction of subtraction for a number smaller than the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, comprising an increase instruction button 444, a decrease instruction button 445, an enter button 446, and designated operation areas 494a to 494d in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature B6, when exchanging for goods using information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means, the player only has to operate the subtraction operation means. The operability for the user can be improved.

  Feature B7. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein the subtraction operation means includes setting operation means (an increase instruction button 444 and a decrease instruction button 445) that can set a subtraction number to be instructed.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to determine the number of game media to be used for exchanging with a product by operating the setting operation unit, so there is no need to provide an operation unit for each type of product to be exchanged. . Therefore, the number of operation means can be reduced.

  Feature B8. The subtraction operation means includes a plurality of number corresponding operation means (designated operation areas 494a to 494d) in which a subtraction number to be designated is determined in advance and the subtraction numbers are different from each other. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B8, since the player only has to operate the operation means corresponding to the product to be exchanged, the operability for the player can be improved.

  Feature B9. The update means is provided so as to be operable by the player, and is a total subtraction operation means (all return in the third embodiment) that allows the instruction to subtract the total number of game media stored in the possible number storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B8, comprising a button 443 and an all-return operation area 496 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature B9, since the player only has to operate the operation means corresponding to the case where the game is finished and the case where the game is exchanged, the operability for the player can be improved. It becomes possible.

Feature B10. The update means includes receiving means (receiving unit 501) for receiving information on the number of game media to be subtracted from the game hall side,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the subtraction number specifying means specifies the number of game media to be subtracted based on information received by the receiving means.

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to perform the subtraction of the number of game media at the time of exchanging with a product with the operation on the game hall side as at least one condition.

  Feature B11. The subtraction execution means performs an operation that allows the player to perform subtraction of the number of game media corresponding to the received information when the reception means receives information on the number of game media to be subtracted. The gaming machine according to Feature B10, which is performed on the condition that

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to prevent the information on the number of game media from being subtracted against the player's intention.

  Note that the following configuration is conceivable as a specific configuration of the feature B11.

The update means includes permission operation means operated to allow the subtraction execution means to execute subtraction when the reception means receives information on the number of game media to be subtracted.
A configuration in which an operation of the permission operation means is included in an operation that can be performed by the player.

  Note that the invention of the above-described feature group B can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. These gaming machines are played using a predetermined game medium.

  For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, a game ball is used as a game medium. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the game ball launch mechanism based on the player's launch operation. Then, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the fired game ball enters the entrance portion provided in the game area.

  For example, in the case of a slot machine, medals are used as game media. When the start lever is operated after the player performs a medal insertion operation, the reel starts to rotate, and the reel stops rotating based on the stop button operation by the player. When the reel is stopped, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to the privilege is granted at a predetermined effective position visible from the front of the slot machine. Is done.

  In addition to pachinko machines and slot machines, there are also known game machines (hereinafter also referred to as “integrated game machines”) in which games similar to slot machines are played using game balls instead of medals as game media. .

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is preferable that management of game media to be used is appropriately performed.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A storage unit (circulation storage tank 231) for storing game balls;
Launching means (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within the range of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 464b), the launch control means (the game ball use in the payout side MPU 462) enabling the launch of the game ball by the launch means. A function of executing a management process, a launch control device 365),
Circulation means (collection passage portion 232, transfer device 233) for supplying the game balls discharged from the game area to the storage portion without discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine;
Specific entry means (first operation port 54, second operation port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means (special prize winning device 53) that is provided in the game area and is capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S1301 in the main MPU 452) to acquire special information based on the game ball entering the specific entry means;
Determination means (function for executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 452) for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is winning correspondence information;
Display means (special drawing display section 62a) having a display section on which a variable display of the pattern is performed;
The result corresponding to the determination result of the determination unit for the special information when starting the variation display of the pattern based on the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition unit and ending the variation display of the pattern Display control means (function for executing the processing of step S1307 to step S1309 in the main MPU 452) to perform display;
When the determination means determines that the winning correspondence information and the result display corresponding to the determination is performed, the gaming state is shifted to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed. State transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1310 to S1313 in the main MPU 452);
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means (function of executing step S1012 in the main MPU 452, step S1613 and step S1614 in the payout MPU 462) Processing function), and
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the winning correspondence information, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In such a case, special notification control means (a function for executing the processing of step S2904 in the main MPU 452 in the main MPU 452) is performed at a timing before the timing at which the result display of the special information is performed. A gaming machine comprising a sound emission control device 91 and a display control device 96).

  According to the feature C1, even when the game ball flows down the game area, the game ball circulates in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to determine the number of game balls used in the game machine, and accordingly, the game hall It is possible to suppress the total number of game balls in.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the transition to the specific game state suddenly occurs in a situation where the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is small In such a case, there is a concern that there may be a disadvantage to the player due to a lack of usable game balls. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of shifting to a specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is less than or equal to the reference number, before the result display that triggers the transition to the specific gaming state is made Special notification is executed. Thereby, the player can replenish information on the number of usable game balls in advance before shifting to the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

Feature C2. Acquisition information storage means (holding storage area 454b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is the target of determination by the determination unit, the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination A destination specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main MPU 452),
With
The special notification control means is the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the winning correspondence information, and the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is below a reference number The special notification may be executed at a timing prior to the start of the variable display times of the pattern for the special information. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to execute the special notification at an early stage, and for the player, the information on the number of usable game balls should be replenished with a margin until the game state shifts to the specific game state. Is possible.

Feature C3. As a determination result of the determination means, a predetermined game in which opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed in a manner in which a game ball is expected to enter the variable pitching means lower than in the case of the winning correspondence information. Predetermined response results (explicit high-precision winning results) for transitioning the game state to the state are included,
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence result, the special notification control unit is independent of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage unit, The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or C2, wherein the special notification is not executed.

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the special notification is performed, and the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

Feature C4. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means (frequency information storage area 464a) in which cash correspondence information is stored when cash is inserted. Cash correspondence information is converted into information on the number of gaming balls and stored in the possible number storage means,
The special notification control means is a game in which the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is equal to or less than a reference number when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the winning correspondence information. Even if it corresponds to the number of balls, the special notification is not executed when the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C3.

  When cash correspondence information is stored, it is possible to convert the number of usable game balls to information early, so there is little information on the number of game balls in a situation where cash correspondence information is stored. Even so, the disadvantage suffered by the player in the event of sudden transition to a specific gaming state is low. Under such circumstances, according to the feature C4, the execution of the special notification is restricted regardless of the information on the number of game balls in the situation where the cash correspondence information is stored. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the special notification is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

Feature C5. A storage unit (circulation storage tank 231) for storing game balls;
Launching means (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within the range of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 464b), the launch control means (the game ball use in the payout side MPU 462) enabling the launch of the game ball by the launch means. A function of executing a management process, a launch control device 365),
Specific entry means (first operation port 54, second operation port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means (special prize winning device 53) that is provided in the game area and is capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S1301 in the main MPU 452) to acquire special information based on the game ball entering the specific entry means;
Determination means (function for executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 452) for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is winning correspondence information;
Display means (special drawing display section 62a) having a display section on which a variable display of the pattern is performed;
The result corresponding to the determination result of the determination unit for the special information when starting the variation display of the pattern based on the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition unit and ending the variation display of the pattern Display control means (function for executing the processing of step S1307 to step S1309 in the main MPU 452) to perform display;
When the determination means determines that the winning correspondence information and the result display corresponding to the determination is performed, the gaming state is shifted to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed. State transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1310 to S1313 in the main MPU 452);
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means (function of executing step S1012 in the main MPU 452, step S1613 and step S1614 in the payout MPU 462) Processing function), and
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the winning correspondence information, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In such a case, special notification control means (a function for executing the processing of step S2904 in the main MPU 452 in the main MPU 452) is performed at a timing before the timing at which the result display of the special information is performed. A gaming machine comprising a sound emission control device 91 and a display control device 96).

  According to the feature C5, since the player cannot directly insert the game ball into the storage unit, the possibility that the non-regular game ball is used is reduced, and management of the game ball to be used is appropriately performed. Is possible.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the transition to the specific game state suddenly occurs in a situation where the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is small In such a case, there is a concern that there may be a disadvantage to the player due to a lack of usable game balls. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of shifting to a specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is less than or equal to the reference number, before the result display that triggers the transition to the specific gaming state is made Special notification is executed. Thereby, the player can replenish information on the number of usable game balls in advance before shifting to the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A storage unit (circulation storage tank 231) for storing game balls;
Launching means (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Circulation means (collection passage portion 232, transfer device 233) for supplying the game balls discharged from the game area to the storage portion without discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine;
A ball entry means (general winning port 52) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
With
It is a configuration in which the player directly throws the game ball into the storage unit and takes out the game ball from the storage unit,
Furthermore, the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 464b) is configured to be able to fire game balls for the information of the number of game balls,
The information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is fired by the launch means by the update means (function for executing game ball management processing and return management processing in the payout side MPU 462, operation unit 441). In this case, the game ball number is updated so as to be subtracted, and when the game ball enters the ball entry means, it is updated so that the number of game balls is added by the number corresponding thereto,
The updating means includes
Information output means for outputting information on the total number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means when the player performs an information output operation (function for executing the process of step S2011 in the payout side MPU 462); ,
An erasure unit (a function for executing the process of step S2012 in the payout side MPU 462) for erasing the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage unit when information output by the information output unit is performed;
Even if the information output operation is performed, the output prohibiting means for prohibiting the information output by the information output means (the processing of steps S2001, S2003, and S2004 in the payout side MPU 462 is performed even if the information output operation is performed. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since the information on the number of usable game balls is stored in the possible number storage means, it becomes possible to substitute the actual game ball with the information on the number of game balls. It is possible to reduce the total number of game balls. In addition, even if the game ball flows down the game area, it will circulate in the game machine, so that it is possible to determine the number of game balls used in the game machine, and accordingly, the number of game balls in the game hall It becomes possible to suppress the total number.

  In this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, even if an information output operation is performed, information output by the information output means is prohibited. As a result, if the information of the total number of game balls is output, it may be disadvantageous to the player, or if the information output becomes complicated, the information output operation by the player is invalidated. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the predetermined situation includes a situation in which a launch operation is performed by a player.

  According to the feature D2, information on the total number of game balls is prevented from being output in a situation where game balls are being fired. This reliably prevents the update of the information on the number of game balls accompanying the launch of the game ball and the output of the information on the total number of game balls from occurring, and the information on the number of game balls is suitably used. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature D3. The predetermined situation includes a situation in which information on the number of game balls corresponding to the incoming ball is not reflected in the information in the possible number storage unit after the game ball has entered the incoming ball means. A gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  If the information on the number of game balls is newly added immediately after the information on the total number of game balls is output, the player needs to perform the information output operation again, which is complicated. In particular, in a configuration in which the storage medium is ejected, it becomes necessary to repeatedly eject the storage medium. On the other hand, according to the feature D3, the occurrence of the event can be suppressed.

Feature D4. Specific entry means (first operation port 54, second operation port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means (special prize winning device 53) that is provided in the game area and is capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S1301 in the main MPU 452) to acquire special information based on the game ball entering the specific entry means;
Determination means (function for executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 452) for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is winning correspondence information;
State transition means (step S1310 in the main MPU 452 for shifting the game state to a specific game state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed when the determination means determines that the winning correspondence information is provided. A function of executing the process of step S1313);
With
The update means is configured to update the information in the possible number storage means so that the number of game balls is added by a number corresponding to a game ball entering the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D, wherein the predetermined situation includes a situation in which a gaming state is the specific gaming state.

  If the information on the total number of game balls is output in the specific game state, a situation may occur in which the game balls cannot be launched even though the game state is in the specific game state. On the other hand, according to the feature D4, the occurrence of the event can be suppressed.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A storage unit (circulation storage tank 231) for storing game balls;
Launching means (launch solenoid 214) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within the range of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 464b), the launch control means (the game ball use in the payout side MPU 462) enabling the launch of the game ball by the launch means. A function of executing a management process, a launch control device 365),
Specific entry means (first operation port 54, second operation port 55) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Variable entry means (special prize winning device 53) that is provided in the game area and is capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S1301 in the main MPU 452) to acquire special information based on the game ball entering the specific entry means;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 452) for executing the determination process on the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Effect control means (sound emission control device 91, display control device 96) for controlling effect execution means (symbol display device 61) so that the effect is executed;
A specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode) in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed after the determination result of the determining means becomes the specific determination result (low-probable big hit result or most advantageous big hit result) ) State transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1310 to S1313 in the main MPU 452);
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means (function of executing step S1012 in the main MPU 452, step S1613 and step S1614 in the payout MPU 462) Processing function), and
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
The production control means includes
Execution control means (process of steps S3301 to S3309 in the sound emission control device 91) that causes the effect execution means to execute the effect determined to be executed by the effect lottery performed based on the content of the special information. A display control device 96),
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In the case where the production lottery is performed, the production included in the production lottery of the production lottery is not related to the result of the production lottery at the timing before the transition to the specific gaming state is triggered by the special information. Specific control means (sound emission control device 91) that is executed or that is an effect different from the effect corresponding to the result of the effect lottery and is included in the lottery of the effect lottery. A function for executing the effect content change process in the display control device 96),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the possibility that the non-regular game ball is used is reduced, and management of the game ball to be used is appropriately performed. Is possible.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the transition to the specific game state suddenly occurs in a situation where the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is small In such a case, there is a concern that there may be a disadvantage to the player due to a lack of usable game balls. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of transitioning to a specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is less than or equal to the reference number, a predetermined effect is forced before the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. Is executed automatically. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to replenish information on the number of available game balls, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

  Furthermore, as a method for urging that information on the number of available game balls to be supplemented as described above, an effect included in the effect lottery is used. This not only reduces the amount of data required for gaming machines, but also makes it possible to encourage players to replenish information on the number of available game balls as part of the presentation, giving the player a sense of incongruity. It is possible to achieve the above effects while reducing the possibility of being lost.

Feature E2. The execution control means, when the special information corresponds to the specific determination result, at a timing prior to the transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the special information ( The first effect or the premium effect) is executed by the effect executing means with a predetermined probability,
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number In the case where the number of gaming balls corresponds, the effect execution means executes the effect in the specific mode at a timing before the transition to the specific game state triggered by the special information. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be performed.

  According to the feature E2, when there is a possibility of shifting to the specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is equal to or less than the reference number, the specific mode effect is performed before the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. Executed. Then, the effect of the specific mode is an effect that is executed with a predetermined probability when the transition to the specific game state is to be performed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to replenish information on the number of available game balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages. Furthermore, the effect of a specific aspect is used as a method for prompting the user to replenish information on the number of available game balls as described above. This not only reduces the amount of data required for gaming machines, but also makes it possible to encourage players to replenish information on the number of available game balls as part of the presentation, giving the player a sense of incongruity. It is possible to achieve the above effects while reducing the possibility of being lost.

  The “predetermined probability” is a probability that is greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Feature E3. The effect of the specific mode is an effect indicating that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed thereafter, or an effect indicating that the degree of expectation that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed thereafter is high. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, characterized by:

  According to the feature E3, as an effect of the specific mode, an effect indicating that the transition to the specific game state is performed thereafter, or an effect indicating that the degree of expectation that the transition to the specific game state is performed thereafter is high is executed. Therefore, in the configuration in which the information that the number of usable game balls should be replenished using a normal effect, the player can easily recognize the necessity of replenishment.

Feature E4. Acquisition information storage means (holding storage area 454b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of determination by the determination unit, the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination A destination specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main MPU 452),
With
The execution control unit is configured so that the special notification effect determined to be executed by the effect lottery based on the content of the specification result of the destination specifying unit is before the predetermined special information is determined by the determination unit. Is executed by the production execution means at the timing of
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number The special notification effect is executed in a manner unrelated to the result of the effect lottery at a timing before the special information is determined by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that:

  According to the feature E4, the special notification effect corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is executed at a timing before the special information is determined by the determination unit. is there. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the order to be determined by the determination means is the target of the determination regarding the special information that is later. A game of confirming or estimating the result according to the content of the special notification effect is added, and the game is diversified.

  In this case, a special notification effect is used to notify that information on the number of available game balls should be supplemented. This makes it possible to promptly notify that information on the number of available game balls should be replenished, and for the player, until the information on the number of available game balls shifts to a specific game state. It is possible to replenish with sufficient margin.

Feature E5. The effect execution means performs the individual display of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means and corresponding to the number of special information not determined by the determination means. The number can be reported,
The execution control means adjusts the individual display mode corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification effect among the individual displays based on the result of the effect lottery, thereby It is to execute the notification effect,
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number When the number of game balls corresponds to the number of game balls, the individual display mode corresponding to the special information is the result of the effect lottery at a timing before the special information is determined by the determining means. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein the gaming machine has an unrelated aspect.

  According to the feature E5, in the configuration in which the special notification effect is performed using the individual display, the information on the number of usable game balls can be obtained by adjusting the individual display mode for the special information corresponding to the specific determination result. Is notified that it should be replenished. This makes it clear to the player how long the information on the number of available game balls should be replenished, and the replenishment work can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature E6. The effect control means increases the number of the individual displays when the special information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means, and the individual display when the special information is a target of determination by the determination means. Adjusting means (a function of executing the process of step S3312 in the sound emission control device 91, the display control device 96),
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number The feature E5 is characterized in that when the number of game balls corresponds to the number of game balls, the mode of the individual display corresponding to the special information is changed even when the number of the individual displays is not changed. Game machines.

  According to the feature E6, when it is necessary to notify that the information on the number of usable game balls should be supplemented, the mode of the individual display is changed regardless of the timing of changing the number of individual displays. . In this case, it is expected that the player will be surprised by the change in the mode, and the degree of attention to the specific mode can be increased.

Feature E7. The execution control means terminates the game turn effect in a manner corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after starting the game turn effect by the effect execution means. Is determined by the effect lottery based on the content of the determination result of the determination means,
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number If the number of game balls is corresponding to the number of game balls, the effects included in the lottery of the effect lottery are executed regardless of the result of the effect lottery during the game round effect triggered by the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that:

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to notify that information on the number of usable game balls should be supplemented using the game times effect. In addition, it is possible to notify that the information on the number of available game balls should be supplemented only in the game times for the special information corresponding to the specific determination result. Can be reduced.

Feature E8. As a determination result of the determination means, a predetermined game state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed in a manner in which the game ball is expected to enter the variable pitching means less than the specific determination result (Open / close execution mode of low-frequency winning mode) includes a predetermined determination result (explicit high probability winning result) that the game state will shift,
The execution control of the effect by the specific control means is not executed even if the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined determination result. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E8, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the notification that the information on the number of usable game balls should be supplemented is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the notification impairs the original game performance is reduced. Is done.

Feature E9. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means (frequency information storage area 464a) in which cash correspondence information is stored when cash is inserted. Cash correspondence information is converted into information on the number of gaming balls and stored in the possible number storage means,
The execution control of the production by the specific control means is the case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result and the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means. Even if the information corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than the reference number, it is not executed when the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  When cash correspondence information is stored, it is possible to convert the number of usable game balls to information early, so there is little information on the number of game balls in a situation where cash correspondence information is stored. Even so, the disadvantage suffered by the player in the event of sudden transition to a specific gaming state is low. Under such circumstances, according to the feature E9, in the situation where the cash correspondence information is stored, the execution of the notification that the information on the number of usable game balls should be supplemented is limited regardless of the information on the number of game balls. Is done. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the frequency with which the notification is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

  Feature E10. Features E1 to E characterized in that the game balls discharged from the game area are provided with circulation means (a collection passage 232, a transfer device 233) for supplying the game balls to the storage without being discharged outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of E9.

  According to the feature E10, in the configuration in which the game balls circulate in the game machine, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  The inventions of the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a game ball is used as a game medium. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the game ball launch mechanism based on the player's launch operation. Then, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the fired game ball enters the entrance portion provided in the game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is preferable that management of game media to be used is appropriately performed.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 13 ... Main body frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 33 ... Upper plate, 37 ... Launch operation device, 46 ... Launch rail, 47 ... Ball supply device, 48 ... Launch solenoid, 51 ... Game board, 51a ... Inner rail portion, 51b ... outer rail portion, 52 ... general winning port, 53 ... special prize winning device, 54 ... first operating port, 55 ... second operating port, 124 ... dispensing device, 131 ... ball feeding device, 141 ... take Inlet / outlet passage section, 142... Ball feed detection sensor, 151... Recovery passage formation body, 152... Supply passage section, 154 .. foul ball collection section, 155. PA: Game area.

Claims (10)

Launching means for launching a launch ball toward the game area;
A pitching part into which a launching ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the launch ball entering the pitching portion;
A sphere storage section for storing a sphere;
Taking-in means for taking in the sphere stored in the sphere storage unit;
When a sphere is taken in by the taking-in means, a firing control means for enabling the launching ball to be fired by the launching means;
With
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the launch control means makes the possible state and the launch means launches a fire ball, the fire ball different from the ball that triggered the possible state is fired.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the ball storage unit allows a player to replenish the ball storage unit with the ball.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when a privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, a ball corresponding to the grant is paid out to the ball storage unit.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the ball taken in by the take-in means is not used as a launch target of the launch means.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the ball taken in by the taking-in means is discharged outside the gaming machine.   6. The circulation means according to claim 1, further comprising: a circulation means for allowing the launch ball discharged from the game area to be used as a launch target of the launch means without being discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the ball and the launch ball are made of different materials. Provided with a launch operation means operated by a player,
The launching operation is performed on the launching operation means, whereby the taking-in of the ball is performed by the taking-in means, and the launching ball is fired by the launching means. A gaming machine according to claim 1. Capture detection means for detecting a sphere captured by the capture means or the captured sphere; and
A ball supply means for supplying a game ball to the launch means;
With
The launch control means controls the sphere supply means so that one launch ball is supplied to the launch means when one sphere is detected by the capture detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8. A base body comprising the launching means and the game area;
A front body that is provided to the base body so as to be openable and closable, and includes the ball storage section and the take-in means;
A lead-out passage portion for leading the sphere taken in by the taking-in means toward a side different from the firing means side;
With
The intake detection means is provided to detect a sphere passing through the lead-out passage portion,
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the lead-out passage portion and the intake detection means are provided in the base body.

Images